JP7088386B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a contacting means capable of contacting a gaming ball is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-223176

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of making the flow of the gaming ball suitable by the contacting means .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making the flow of a gaming ball suitable by abutting means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can come into contact with the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball. It is provided with a contact means which is formed and affects the game ball flowing down the flow passage so as to flow into the second branch passage by the contact, and the game ball flows down to the flow passage. It is provided with a switching means capable of switching between the permissible and the limit of the above, and a displacement means having a predetermined passage which is communicated with the first branch passage and can receive a game ball from the first branch passage and is formed displaceably. When the game ball flowing down from the flow-down passage to the first branch passage can flow down to the predetermined passage, a part of the displacement means is brought into contact with the contact means. The contact between the abutting means and the game ball is released , and the first branch passage is not provided with the detecting means capable of detecting the game ball existing in the first branch passage, and the second branch passage is not provided. Is provided with a detection means capable of detecting a game ball existing in the second branch passage, and the side connected to the first branch passage in a state where the displacement means is in contact with the contact means. It is possible to configure a state in which the end portion of the predetermined passage is invisible, and a state in which the end portion is visible in a state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the abutting means. It is configurable .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the flow of the gaming ball can be made suitable by the contacting means .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. (A) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first overhanging state, and (c) in the second overhanging state. 18 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in line XXIIa-XXIIa, and FIG. 19B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range XXXVa of FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range XXXVb of FIG. 34 (a). (A) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range XL of FIG. 39. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a top view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a rear view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of a decorative unit. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow LVIIIa of FIG. 57, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow LVIIIb of FIG. 57. It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative unit. It is a rotation unit in the direction of the arrow LVa of FIG. 55, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow LVb of FIG. 55. It is a rotation unit in the direction of the arrow LVa of FIG. 55, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow LVb of FIG. 55. (A) is a closed state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is an open state, which are side views of the decorative unit and the right transmission member. (A) is an open state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is a closed state, which are side views of the decorative unit and the right transmission member. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the closed state, and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the open state. (A) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction view of the arrow LXVIb of FIG. 66 (a), and (c) is the arrow LXVIc of FIG. 66 (a). It is a side view of a rotating body in a directional view. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (A) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is open. (A) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. It is a top view of the lower displacement unit in the direction view of the arrow LXII of FIG. 71. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the ball pedestal, (b) is a front view of the ball pedestal, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal in the LXXIVc-LXXIVc line of FIG. 74 (a). Is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit in the LXXVII-LXXVII line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the overhanging position. (A) is a front view of the variable portion, and (b) is a rear view of the variable portion. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 97 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in line CC of FIG. 97 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range CI of FIG. 100. It is a front view of the rotating unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view of the displacement unit. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXIII-CXIII line of FIG. 111. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 77, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal medium.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

It should be noted that the second winning opening during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

Further, on the left side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a third winning opening 82 in which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins, the third winning opening 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in a state of communicating with the first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13 so as to be openable and closable. Normally, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball wins a third prize. It is difficult to win a prize in the mouth 82. On the other hand, when a big hit is determined triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) for a predetermined time before, after, or during the big hit. The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. Further, a sensor device SE1 for detecting a passing ball is mounted on the downstream side of the third winning opening 82.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 5640, and the passage of the first through gate 66 sleeping ball. As a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed with the above as an opportunity, when the symbol of "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be opened.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and it becomes easy for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as a variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 200 and the gaming board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state is the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is projected from the state shown in FIG. 7 to the first overhang position described later, and in FIG. 10, the lower displacement member 440 is the maximum overhang. The states displaced to the second overhanging position, which is the position, are shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700, and a rotation unit 700 are provided. A distribution unit 500 and a ball throwing unit 600 attached to the back surface of the game board 13 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably arranged on the front view rectangular horizontally long base member 910 and the base member 910 which are arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. An upper displacement member 940 is provided, and an effect of rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding it is operably formed on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably arranged on a horizontally long base member 410 with a rectangular front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 410 thereof. The lower displacement member 440 is provided, and the lower displacement member 440 is slidably and rotationally displaced on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case. A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

The rotating unit 700 is arranged in front of the rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular front view arranged on the right side of the front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the back base 720 thereof. The rotating body 800 is provided, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13 is visible to the player. A detailed description of the rotating unit 700 will be described later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and the game ball thrown from the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 to the back side of the game board 13 is placed in the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. A path for throwing the ball is formed.

The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back surface side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed opposite the path forming member 510, and a base plate thereof. It is provided with a distribution member 540 that distributes a game ball attached to the 520 and flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each throw path (second throw path KR2 or third throw path KR3). The game balls distributed to the distribution member 540 are sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 35. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14.

FIG. 11 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 11 to B04, the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the lowermost position with respect to the base member 410) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. The 420, the link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. It is mainly provided with a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a back base 412 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the back base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction on the paper in FIG. 11), two columnar shaft support pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a shaft support pin 411d. It is mainly provided with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape about the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend long in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, by displacing the protrusions 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, and are upward (upward in FIG. 11) from the left end (left side in FIG. 11) to the right end (right side in FIG. 11) of the front base 411. ) Is opened. Further, in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the axes of the respective arcs are arranged at different positions, and the gap between the facing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, the lower displacement member 440 rotates when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove. It can be displaced while being displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with the sliding without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The details of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411c from being broken (damaged) when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction.

The shaft support pin 411d is a protrusion inserted into the through hole 431a formed at one end of the first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the shaft support pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411d from breaking (damaging) when a force is applied to the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a.

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back surface side of the front base 411 and is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance that abuts on the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from being displaced forward. Further, since the curved wall portion 411e is formed by being curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, the first link member 431 is formed. The plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the above can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The collection port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 to flow into the collection port 411f and collect it by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later. The downstream side of the collection port 411f is connected to the collection path of the ball. The recovery port 411f is a hole formed so as to project from the right end portion of the front base 411, and the opening surface thereof is a surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower displacement member 440 in the first overhanging state. It is a surface located on the lower side of the emission opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

Further, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the collection port 411f and quickly collected.

The back base 412 has groove portions 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 12) toward the back side, and a locking portion 412c formed so as to project toward the front side in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b. Formed primarily in preparation.

The groove portion 412a is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c, and faces the shaft support pin 411c. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held in a non-detachable manner from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after inserting the shaft support pin 411c into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, the shaft support pin 411c and the front base 411 when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is possible to prevent bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d, and faces the shaft support pin 411d. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held in a non-detachable manner from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 after inserting the shaft support pin 411d into the through hole 431a. Further, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411d, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the shaft support pin 411d becomes the front base 411. It is possible to prevent bending and breaking from the connecting portion of.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end side of the urging spring SP1 described later, and is formed on the outer side of the urging spring SP1. As a result, one end side of the urging spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the urging spring SP1 will be described later.

The transmission member 420 has a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated by driving the transmission gear 421. It is mainly provided with a member 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a toothed surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated in the same manner.

The cam member 422 is formed in a shape in which one ends of two semicircles having different outer shapes in the front view are combined, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the semicircle having a small outer shape of the cam member 422, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. A sliding groove 422c recessed on the back surface side facing the link member 430, which will be described later, is formed in a semicircular portion having a large outer shape of the cam member 422.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c so that the cam member 422 can rotate the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. It is held rotatably in the center.

Since the cam member 422 is arranged on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshed with the transmission gear 421, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a. can.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side to the other end side. Further, the sliding groove 422c is a stepped portion 422c1 extending downward from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state described later. When the member 440 is located in the second overhanging state described later, the step portion 422c3 extending from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 are in the retracted state and the second overhanging state. It is provided with a step portion 422c2 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d when it is located in the first overhanging state in the intermediate state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape in front view, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side and a columnar connecting projection 431c that protrudes on the back side on the other end side. A plate-shaped projection 431b projecting at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e described above and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion are mainly provided.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the shaft support pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the shaft support pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-shaped protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the position shift of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in the front, and penetrates through the plate-shaped protrusion 431b. It is formed in a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape about the hole 431a, and the protruding length thereof is set to be larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to the second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into the through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head from the back surface side is larger than that of the through hole 432a. Large screws etc. are fastened. As a result, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f projecting to the back surface side is formed at the edge portion of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding the urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the urging spring SP1 fitted to the wall portion 431f, and is formed so as to project like a hook on the back surface side of one end side of the first link member 431. .. Therefore, one end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the locking portion 412c of the rear base 412, and the other end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the link-side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. To. Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in the direction of rotating the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

The sliding projection 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a at a distance substantially the same as the separation distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Further, the tip portion of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the size of the outer diameter of the sliding protrusion 431d is formed to be smaller than the width dimension between the sliding grooves 422c facing each other.

By arranging the sliding projection 431d inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding projection 431d slides and is displaced inside the sliding groove 422c with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

Further, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the plate-shaped protrusion 431b suppresses the displacement of the first link member 431 to the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the rigidity of the sliding groove 422 can be ensured without increasing the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction.

One of the second link members 432 is formed into a long front view rectangle, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through hole 432a formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction and a through hole 432b formed through the other end side in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 432a is a hole for being connected to the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. As a result, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to the lower displacement member 440 described later and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a hole into which the protrusion 482a of the rear case 482, which will be described later, is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 becomes the second link member 432. It is held rotatably against. Therefore, in the drive of the lower displacement member 440, when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced, the displacement is transmitted via the link member 430.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. 15 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 16 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state, and FIG. 17 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. It is a front view of 400. FIG. 18 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state, and FIG. 20 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. It is a rear view of 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 18 to 20 show a state in which the back surface base 412 is transparently viewed.

Further, the retracted state is a state in which the sliding protrusions 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second overhanging state is a state in which the sliding projections 431d are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c3, and the tip end side of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the uppermost position. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding projections 431d are arranged between the facing portions of the step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the sliding groove 422c is set to the shaft portion 422a. It is in a state of being positioned on the right side of the rear view (right side of FIG. 18). In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and is positioned at the step portion 422c1. Therefore, in the first link member 431, the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 18) of the through hole 431a on one end side when viewed from the rear (rotating around the through hole 431a). The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is located on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 18). As a result, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411 are located on the right side (right side in FIG. 18) of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the rear view. It is considered to be a state. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side. Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 is substantially parallel to the left-right direction in the longitudinal direction. It is placed in the state of being. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 15 and 18 to the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 14 and 19 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first overhanging state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the retracted state. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c. In the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d is guided between the facing portions of the inner walls of the step portions 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is from the retracted position to the upper left of the rear view (FIG. 19). It is displaced to the upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 16). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, in the first overhanging state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state to the first overhanging state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the right side of the front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of other displacement accessories. It is possible to suppress collision with other displacement accessories.

Further, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 sides connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, is located. When the ball is launched and falls downward from the exit opening 471 as it is, the ball can be sent to the collection port 411f.

The displacement from the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 16 and 19 to the second overhanging state shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first overhanging state.

In the second overhanging state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first overhanging state, and the cam member 422 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position of the first overhanging state. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the step portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Further, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving protrusion 431d is displaced with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d is guided between the facing portions of the inner wall of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is seen from the position in the first overhanging state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left of FIG. 20).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 17). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, as in the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the collection port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the right side of the front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of the other displacement accessory, and it is possible to suppress collision with the other displacement accessory.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 21 (b) is the first extended state, and FIG. 21 (c) is the second extended state. be. In FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c), the portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps with the first link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 21A, in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the facing surfaces of the inner walls of the step portions 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a at a distance substantially the same as the separation distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating around the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state, the force is applied from the sliding projection 431d to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. can. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the retracted state.

As shown in FIG. 21B, in the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusions 431d of the first link member 431 and the stepped portions 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the facing surfaces of the sliding protrusions 431d. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first overhanging state, the force is applied from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. It can act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the first overhanging state.

Here, in the first overhanging position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in the stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because it is in the intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhanging position (intermediate position of displacement).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, as described above. In addition, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to prevent the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 21 (c), in the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusions 431d of the first link member 431 and the stepped portions 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the facing surfaces of the sliding protrusions 431d. Therefore, as in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a axis acts on the first link member 431 located in the second overhanging state, the force is applied to the sliding projection. From 431d, it can act on the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the second overhanging state.

Further, since each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 is extended in the direction connecting the sliding protrusion 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. The width dimension of can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding projection 431d at which the first link member 431 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first overhanging position, and the second overhanging position is made small. can. Therefore, the first link member 431 in each state can reduce the clearance that can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the width in which the lower displacement member 440 in each state swings due to vibration or inertial force at the time of displacement stop can be reduced, and the player can easily visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, in the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in the direction for reflection when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467. Since it can be regulated, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. 22 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the line XXIIa-XXIIa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 22 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. be. In addition, in FIGS. 19 and 20, the rear surface base 412 is shown transparently, but in FIGS. 22A and 22B, a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state is shown. ..

As shown in FIG. 22A, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is arranged between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of equipment via the second link member 432, it is connected in the front-rear direction by the load of the lower displacement member 440. Since the cam member 422 is arranged forward where there is a risk of bending, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, since the first link member 431 can be suppressed from moving forward, the downward displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state is arranged between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the case of the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of the two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable, so that the rigidity of the link member 430 is weaker than that of the other portions due to the gap, and the link member 430 is easily bent. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the link member 430 from bending. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26. 23 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 23 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that FIG. 26 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 26 (b) shows the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 transparently. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and a base member 470. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably arranged between them and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a protrusion 472 and 473 protruding to the back side on one end side and an erection wall 471a standing on the front side from the edge on the other end side. In the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 23), a projecting wall 477 that protrudes vertically from the upper end of the central portion to the front side in an up-down U-shape, and an engraving on the upper end of the base member 470 from the end portion of the projecting wall 477 to one end side. A rack gear 476 to be installed, a shaft portion 474, 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of the base member 470, and a vertical center portion of the base member 470. It is mainly provided with an opening 479 that extends from one end side to the other end side and is recessed.

The protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 to connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411 as described above. Therefore, it is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facings of the inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The erection wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 facing each other when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470, and has a diameter of a sphere. Set to a larger vertical dimension.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, to rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463, and are larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole of the transmission gears 462 and 463. It is formed in a columnar shape with a small outer diameter.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, the movable rack 464 described later is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 470, so that the transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

When the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450, the projecting wall 477 causes the ball to fall to the outside of the lower displacement member 440. It is a wall surface for suppressing the above, and is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere between the facing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking the flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470, and is one end of the flexible wiring between the wiring locking portion 478 and the base member 470. It is attached to the back surface side of the base member 470 in a state of being via the base member 470. As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to prevent the flexible wiring from being entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 is provided with a protrusion 478a projecting in a columnar shape on the back surface side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes to the back side of the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front surface of the back base 412. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging backward and to prevent the link member 430 from colliding with the back surface base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the slide displacement direction of the movable rack 464 arranged on the front side, and the guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464 described later is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 4621, 462, 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface and slidably displaced in front of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464 and meshed with the rack gear 476. A rack 466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and being slidably displaced in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. It is mainly provided with a receiving portion 467.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole, and the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state of being connected to the drive motor KM2, whereby the base member 470 is attached. Arranged in.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member by inserting the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 into the shaft holes. Further, the transmission gears 461 to 463 are gear trains meshed with each other, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a columnar shape from the front side, and projecting upward from one end side of the upper end surface. The contact plate 464c, the guide plate 464d projecting from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, the rack guide portion 464e projecting to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and projecting to the lower other end. It is mainly provided with a collision portion 464f.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, by arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in a toothed state on the base member 470, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion in which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that abuts on the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to displace the distribution member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The mode of contact between the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-shaped body inserted inside the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479. In this embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a protrusion for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is projected from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f is a wall portion that abuts on the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, to displace the displacement member 492, and is formed so as to project from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed so that the other end side is inclined. As a result, the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492 can be displaced by sliding along the inclined surface thereof.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b which protrudes in a columnar shape from the other end to the back side, and a shaft portion 466b which protrudes to the front side. It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back surface side.

The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464. As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 slides and displaces, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. .. Therefore, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into the opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed of a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the opening 481a. can.

The recessed portion 466d is in a state where the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. can.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, and transmission occurs. There was a risk that the driving force would not be transmitted well from the gear 465 to the rack 466.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is formed because the sliding plate 466c and the opening 481a and the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed at two locations that define the displacement direction of the rack 466. It is possible to suppress the change in the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the displacement state of the above is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 to be hindered.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to project from two positions in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 23A) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is formed. It is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 23) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 most overhangs the movable rack 464).

Here, at the displacement end position, the ball receiving portion 467 arranged on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, so that the ball receiving portion arranged on one end side of the rack 466 is arranged. The other end side of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the tooth joint surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most overhanging with respect to the movable rack 464). In, since it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 23), the rack 466 at a position where the ball receiving portion 467 engages with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a firing operation (rotational operation). Can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds the game ball, is formed in a substantially U-shape in front view, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner portion of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be formed in the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape, and a leg portion 467a protruding downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the urging spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. To. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the rack 466 in a state of being urged around the right side of the front view. A detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the front end thereof is described later with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward. It is set at a position where it abuts on the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and back of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in the front view, and has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at a position substantially intermediate in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that is formed so as to protrude from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front case 481 toward the back surface side, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state where the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the front case 481 in a state where the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and the outer shape in the front view is formed in a rectangular horizontal shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a protruding toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated by fastening a screw or the like whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a. Can be connected in the same state.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or a character, and the pattern or a picture of the character is drawn on the surface of the decorative member 450. The decorative member 450 is mainly provided with a front side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decorative portion 451. As a result, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration portion 451 from above the back side decoration portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, the displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is mainly provided with a shaft portion 492a projecting to the back surface side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, an urging spring SP3 is arranged on the tip end side of the shaft portion 492a into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in an urged state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force that rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 according to its displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold the game ball. Moreover, since the displacement member 492 is formed so as to be injectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball is offset. When a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction in which the displacement member 492 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball, for example, the displacement member 492 is provided in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When the displaceable configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 492 is performed by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. .. That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control of driving the displacement member 492 with the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and ensuring the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. 27 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 28 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 29 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is a figure. 30 (a) to 30 (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 27) with respect to the base member 470. The second position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 28) of the projecting wall 477. The third position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end in the left-right direction of the base member 470.

Further, in FIGS. 27 to 30, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is shown in order, and in FIG. 30C, the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 27, the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, like the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are gathered at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid and displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating axis. It is desirable to make it in the state of being displaced.

According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superposed on the front and back (two-stage rack), so that the position of the center of gravity thereof is slid on the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a and 411b (the rotation axis side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position, so that the lower displacement member 440 is used. The driving force for rotational displacement can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 27 to the second position shown in FIG. 28 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slide-displaced, the transmission gear 465 arranged in the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 in accordance with the slide displacement. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid and displaced to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 28 to the third position shown in FIG. 29 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is released from the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. , Is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 arranged in the shaft portion 466b.

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the front view from the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in front. It is in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and the rotation clockwise around the shaft hole 467b due to the urging force of the urging spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip portion is arranged on the right side of the front view from the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the base member 470 stand. It is arranged inside the recess 481b1 formed between the wall and the wall 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated about 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In the following, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is provided with a recess 481b1 recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. In addition, a leg portion 467a that is engaged with the recess 481b1 is provided, and the posture can be changed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the recess 481b1, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. The structure can be simplified.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid and displaced to the right side in the front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 launches and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440 swings and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. The inertial force can be applied in the opposite direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the sphere is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Next, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. It should be noted that in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c), the transition states in which the ball is received by the ball receiving unit 467 are shown in order.

Further, in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c), the horizontal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is first stretched. The horizontal direction in the output state is illustrated with the reference numeral of the virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first overhanging state is shown with a reference numeral of angle θ. The virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also shown in the figures after FIG. 31.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the virtual line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at the first position. The game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the projecting wall 477 and thrown inside the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 31B, when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown inside the projecting wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can throw the ball. By accepting the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced according to the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be arranged at the first position while the game ball T1 is arranged on the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member is known. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and made visible to the player and the retracted position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is provided. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a dead center. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position and from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. It is formed so that the starting mode can be formed, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player. In the first overhanging state), the displacement is started from the first position, so that the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position, by setting such a first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 The weight can be kept close to the dead point when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410, and the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state is reduced by that amount. It can be difficult to act on the displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while being slidably displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is arranged far away from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. There is a problem that a collision sound is generated due to the collision between the ball and the game ball T1, or the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position, so that the game ball T1 can be displaced to the first position. It can be placed (close) in the vicinity. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while the game ball T1 is received by the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. It can be suppressed from occurring. As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving portion 467 collide with each other, or to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 440, the transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving portion 467 is formed by a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and a rack 466 (rack member), and the ball receiving is received by the rack 466. Since the portion 467 is arranged, when the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are on one side of the lower displacement member 440. It can be kept close to (a fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding groove 411a, 411b side of the front base 411 (the rotation shaft of the lower displacement member 440). It can be easily moved to the side). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position, so that the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced. The driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, the payout operation of the ball will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) to 32 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. In addition, in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 in the payout operation of a sphere is shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the ball payout operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the ejection opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), the payout operation of paying out the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position in order. It is done by.

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is placed on the ball receiving portion 467. With the displacement, it is carried to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position, and the ball receiving portion 471 is applied. It pops out from the inside of the part 467. As a result, the sphere can be discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts the displacement from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is set to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 is subjected to the transmission gear 465 (the transmission gear 465) after the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started. The portion on the rack gear 466a side to which the pinion gear) is meshed is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be kept closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved closer. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and when the third position is reached, the posture can be changed. Therefore, up to the third position, one game ball T1 is received. While it is possible to easily maintain the state held by the portion 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving portion 467, when the second position is reached, the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is used. Therefore, the game ball T1 can be easily discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

The ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c) is paid out at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1). When performing the operation, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member The game ball paid out to the outside of the 440 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the ejection operation when two or more balls are thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 33 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

In addition, in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c) and FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), the transition states of the discharge operation are shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 11A to 11C and FIGS. 12A to 12C, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently viewed, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is seen transparently. The outer shape of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c), when two or more balls are continuously thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to throw the first game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be the first ball. It can be brought into contact with the game ball T1 and fastened to the inside of the projecting wall 477 (see FIG. 33 (b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion is in a state where the first game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467. The 467 can be displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a gaming machine that displaces a ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that more than a specified number of game balls are thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. For example, a game ball exceeding a specified number may enter the transmission mechanism 460 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 and be bitten into a movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that the number of game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the inside of the back case 300).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital region can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the distribution member 540 and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is expanded, and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased. Can be accepted in the orbital region. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving unit 467 and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the games exceeding the specified number. It is possible to prevent problems caused by balls.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later at the second position, and is capable of holding the game ball T1 from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) At least, since it is formed so as to be displaceable by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball, after receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (first direction). ), The number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the region in the first direction from the 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, since the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the first game ball T1 and 2 It is possible to separate the game ball T2 after the ball. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), the game of the second and subsequent balls is maintained while the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1. The operation of discharging only the sphere T2 from the orbital region becomes possible.

Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball and then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position to eject the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the second ball is used. The game ball T2 of the above falls to the upper part of the rack 466, the second game ball T2 is thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is displaced downward by the downward displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will not be able to be discharged to the outside.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed, and after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the first position opposite to the exit opening 471 is performed. Since it can be displaced to, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine provided with a bonus device that ejects a game ball thrown into the accessory, a position for receiving the ball is performed by a member that ejects the ball (ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment). If only the ball is displaced to the (second position) and the position where the ball is ejected (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected to the member that ejects the ball. Where there is a risk of discharging the second game ball T2 on the side opposite to the exit (exit opening 471), in the present embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected from the exit opening 471. By displacing the second game ball T2 to the first position on the opposite side of the ball, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), after the second game ball T2 is thrown onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled to the exit opening 471 side in a state of being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 in which the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (above FIG. 34 (a)). Is placed in. Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Further, since the side surface of the right side (right side of FIG. 34 (a)) of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the second game ball. The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

Further, since the leg portion 467a is in a state of being tilted approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a and the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). Be abutted. As a result, when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471, a force for lifting the second game ball T2 upward can be generated on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg portion 467a is projected from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof is the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) sent to the region, the ball receiving portion 467 is in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction). When displaced to, the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half surface with the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the amount of the projecting length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Further, since the leg portion 467a has a role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and a role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof by engaging with the recess 481b1, the number of parts can be increased accordingly. It can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, that is). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the recovery port 411f is arranged below the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is sent to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is in a state of being located below the exit opening 471. Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the game ball T2 that has been ejected is sent to the collection port 411f.

That is, since the collection port 411f is arranged vertically below the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) and has an opening in the vertical direction, the ball receiving portion 467 is the first. The game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) that is moved along with the movement in the three-position direction (first direction) and discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is received from the opening of the collection port 411f. Can be collected.

Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is vertical at the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) at least in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state. It is arranged downward in the direction. As a result, the game ball (that is, two balls) discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first overhanging state, or the second overhanging state. The game ball T2) after the eyes can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

It should be noted that, in the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1), FIGS. 33 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to (c). When the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected as shown in the above, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f. Further, when the lower displacement member 440 discharges the ball receiving portion 467 at the position of the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 is discharged. The game ball paid out to the outside of the 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the exit opening 471 will be described. 35 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range XXXVa of FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 35 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range XXXVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the erection wall 471a side to open the exit. It can be pushed out of the downward displacement member 440 from 471.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 can be returned to the state before the rotational operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, it is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 from falling off.

Further, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the orbital region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction) and is recessed. A standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of 481b1 is provided, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 accompany the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the ball T2 is moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulateably formed. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to easily eject only the second and subsequent game balls from the orbital region.

That is, since the height of the standing wall 471a from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the tip of the standing wall is lower than the radius of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg portion, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a, so that the game ball can easily get over the erection wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is in contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a), and the reaction force is applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the posture change of the ball receiving portion and prevent the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 from falling off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball is not interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, so that the leg By engaging the portion 467a with the concave portion 481b1, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 36 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the distribution unit 500 is attached to the base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 520 to face the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a ball can flow down, a distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back surface side of the base plate 520, and a base plate 520 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 520. And an extension path member 530 that extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the path forming member 510 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 520 has a columnar shaft portion 523 projecting to the back surface side, a first opening 521 formed through an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius larger than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 that is formed through a large arc, a rolling portion 525 that has a U-shaped cross section that opens on the upper end side and extends in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly provided with a locking portion 524 to be formed.

The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 described later and attaches the distribution member 540 to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545. Will be done.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the dimensions in the circumferential direction of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view. The length of the arc is formed large.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion for engaging the urging spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the sphere rolls, and has a curved shape formed in a U shape while being inclined downward toward one end on the left side of the rear view (left side in FIG. 36 (b)). It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 from stopping at the rolling portion and to roll the ball to one end side.

Further, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525b protruding from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inside of the U-shape, and an opening 525a opening at one end on the back side.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions where they are staggered in front view. Therefore, since the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position (FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b). )reference). Therefore, when the throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before moving the ball receiving portion 467 to the second position. There is a risk of being struck.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed so as to project from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, and the gaming ball passes through the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3. Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position), the required time can be lengthened by that amount, so that the game ball can be reliably placed in the ball receiving portion 467. Can be received by. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed down, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed so as to be open to the back surface side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and the outer shape in the rear view thereof is formed to be larger than the size of the sphere. Therefore, the ball that rolls the rolling portion 525 toward one end is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular vertically long plate having a width smaller in the left-right direction than the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side thereof. By forming the space between the facing surfaces larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a flow path of a plurality of spheres is formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 includes a first opening 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first throwing path KR1 formed between the side walls of the first opening 511, and a second throwing path connected to the first throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3 are formed through in the front-rear direction. On the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth throwing path KR4 formed by the plurality of openings 514,515,516, the wall on the back side of the openings 514,515,516, and the fourth throwing path KR4. It is mainly provided with a fourth opening 517 to be opened.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the inside of the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510 and has an outer shape larger than the ball. It is formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball throwing unit 600 so that the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 can flow in.

The first throwing path KR1 is a path through which a ball flowing in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth throwing path KR4 is formed so as to extend to about one-third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3. Will be done. That is, a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second throwing path KR2 or the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second throwing path KR2 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when the ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the second throwing path KR2, it is discharged from the second opening 512 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball discharged from the second opening is collected by the collection route. Further, a sensor device SE2 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second throwing path KR2). Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second throwing path KR2. It is possible to detect the number of game balls passing through the path KR3.

That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, by the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the balls passing through the second throwing path KR2 (sensor device SE2). When the number is 7, it can be detected that one game ball is flowing (reserved) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third throwing path KR3 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the third throwing path KR3, it is discharged from the third opening 513.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (opposite end side of the opening 525a) of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown inside the rolling portion 525. That is, the ball thrown to the third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, respectively, and the ball winning in the third winning opening 82 is thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins in the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth throwing path KR4 is formed by being connected to the openings 514 to 516, is connected to one path on the downstream side, and is connected to the fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball winning in the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown into the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the lower side open, and is extended in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by disposing it on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , The ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down as in the case of the protrusion 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 has a regulation plate 541 and a storage plate 542 protruding from the front side in a plate shape, a shaft hole 545 formed through the upper one end side, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back side. It is formed mainly with and.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed through the shaft hole 545 in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 can rotate to the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 into the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the shaft hole to the shaft portion 523 from the back surface side. It is attached in a good condition.

The control plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 via the first opening 521, and the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows into the second throwing path KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the above, and is formed so as to project toward the front side from the end surface on the front side of the shaft hole 545, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement region of the regulation plate 541 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 522 and stores the balls flowing down the second throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542, and is a plate member of the shaft hole 545. It is formed so as to project to the front side from the end surface on the front side, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is formed to be larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore, the storage plate 542 is formed at a position separated from the shaft hole 545 from the regulation plate 541. As a result, the regulation plate 541 can be projected to the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second throwing path KR2. Further, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that exerts a rotational driving force on the distribution member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and projects to the other end side of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, a protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 which is the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. As a result, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Therefore, since the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Further, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide with each other. The details of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at the contact portion of the protruding portion 543 with the contact plate 464c at the protruding end. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the urging spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a force to rotate to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the flow path of the ball of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 500 in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 36 (a). In FIG. 39, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 39, a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second throwing path KR2. ..

As shown in FIG. 39, in the first throwing path KR1, the lower end side of the flow path is tilted toward the central portion in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 39) of the base plate 520, and the tilted portion is gentle. It is formed by being curved in an S shape. Further, the tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 tilts toward the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. It is connected in the state of being connected.

As a result, by colliding the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 with the lower surface of the tilted portion, the flowing direction of the ball can be directed from the gravity direction to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third throwing path KR3.

Here, the flow path through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow path, and the game ball flowing down the flow path to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A game machine for sorting is known.

However, since the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are the first branch. It is evenly distributed (that is, half each) to the aisle and the second branch aisle. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 which is formed so as to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the third throwing path KR3 is provided, and the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 hits the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact with the ball, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be changed.

As for the displacement of the distribution member 540, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by using the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacementing the distribution member 540 is separately provided. Can be unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the drive means, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the sorting member 540 is set to the third throwing path in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. By switching to, the displacement member can surely receive the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the gaming ball flowing down the flow path is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), the flow of the game ball in the third is restricted. In a state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the second throw path KR2 (second branch passage), the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) that allows the flow of the game ball in the third throw path KR3 is provided. , Can give the player an interest.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the third throwing path, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, the game balls are stored in the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate is used. When the distribution destination by 541 is the second throwing path KR2, the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is allowed to flow down, and the game ball stored in the third throwing path KR3 can be allowed to flow down (open). can. As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) to one of the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path KR2, the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is distributed. It is possible to form an action of flowing down (opening). Further, these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) in which the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed is provided, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation, that is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, the two parts are operated. The structure to be used becomes complicated and the reliability of operation is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be displaceable between the storage position (first state position) and the regulation position (second state position), and when the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 541 is the first. 3 The ball throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to the restricted position. In this state, the regulating plate 541 is arranged at a position where the second throwing path KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path is allowed. In addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) to one of the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path, by displacing the ball at two positions (reservoir position and restricted position), the first 3 It is possible to form an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the throwing path KR3 and an operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open), and these are stored. And the opening operation can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

The distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the third throwing path. By projecting to KR3, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the distribution member 540 is formed in an arcuately curved shape centered on the rotation axis. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is arranged in such a posture that the side facing the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third throwing path KR3 protrudes. In the initial state (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in an direction that easily regulates the flow of the game ball. It is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in a state where the storage plate 542 is projected to the maximum to the third throwing path to restrict the flow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be suppressed from going wild.

The distribution unit 500 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 (integrated member) to urge the regulation plate 541 in the direction of projecting to the third throwing path (first branch passage). ), And the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP4 is used. , The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 projects into the third emergency path.

In this case, the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Since the distance from the ball is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the storage plate 542 is likely to be immersed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes into the third throwing path (first branch passage) due to its own weight, the own weight is used. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 projects to the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging spring SP4 (the urging means) is dropped, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes to the third throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game is played to the third throwing path. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down.

Further, it is provided with an urging spring SP4 that applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is a distribution member. By displacing the 540 in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the distribution destination. , The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being inadvertently switched. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, it is not necessary that the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the distribution member 540. That is, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500 in the range XL of FIG. 39. Note that FIG. 40 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the restricted position. Further, in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall of the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 542 and the inner wall of the third throw path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, the distance dimension L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the first throwing path KR1 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere and larger than the diameter of the sphere. Set small. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be set to one. In the following, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position, the restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3. , The storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance dimension L3 from the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 541 to the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulated position and the storage position, the ball thrown in the first throwing path KR1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to form a state in which a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3 and is thrown into the second throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the flow path of 1 is divided into the flow path of 2, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either of them.

Further, the urging spring SP4 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 in the second throwing path KR2, so that the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third throwing path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is the first. Since it is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the 1st throw path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the 1st throw path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the above, the game ball can be pushed into the second throwing path KR with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. May be placed in. That is, the shaft of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the back surface of the third throwing path KR3 on the downstream side of the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). .. In this case, the arrangement position of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed on the distribution member 540 is formed at the same position as that of the present embodiment.

In the state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position as described later, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the restricted position to the storage position.

Further, in this case, the shapes of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view are formed in an arc shape centered on the point P. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement region of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 on the outside of the third throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 41 (a) and 41 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. 42 (a) and 42 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 40 (a). Further, from FIG. 41 (a) to FIG. 42 (b), the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in are shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 41 (a) to 42 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 in a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, as described above. , The game ball T1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located on the downstream side of the distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere from the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542. Is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1 side (see FIG. 41).

Therefore, as described above, the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side thereof. Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the third throwing path KR3, the game ball is started after the storage plate 542 starts to protrude into the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state where the flow of gravity can be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is switched from the second throw path KR2 (second branch passage) to the third throw path KR3 and the game ball is distributed to the third throw path KR3, the game ball is distributed. It is possible to easily make the protrusion of the storage plate 542 in time for the regulation of the flow.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3, and in a state of being maximally protruding from the third throwing path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is acted on from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from immersing in the recess 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first throw path KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the game ball T2 becomes a ball. The ball is thrown in the direction from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1, the game ball T2 is sent to the second throwing path KR2 without being thrown inside the third throwing path KR3. Since it can be guided, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without staying inside the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

That is, the inner wall on the side of the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) on the side where the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage) is desired allows the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 to pass through the third throwing path KR3 (first). Since the last game ball of the specified number (1 ball) stored in the branch passage) is formed so as to be guided to the side surface of the third throw path KR3, the game ball flowing down the first throw path KR1. Can be easily flowed down to the second throwing path KR2 after colliding with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls.

Of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Further, in the present embodiment, the specified number is set to one ball. In this case, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing path KR3.

Further, as described above, in the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage), the lower end side of the flow path is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 39), and the lower end side thereof is tilted. The portion is formed by being curved in a gentle S shape. That is, since the flow direction of the downstream end of the first throw path KR1 (flow passage) is formed in the flow direction of the upstream end of the third throw path KR3, the game ball flowing down the first throw path KR1 is the third. If the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the throw path is different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the third throw path KR3. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the third throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second throwing path KR2 due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

Further, since the upper end portion of the third throwing path KR3 is formed so as to be inclined in the inclined direction of the lower end portion of the first throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. At the same time, it can be set to the second throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the bounce direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means). 3 When a specified number (1 ball) of game balls is stored in the throwing path KR3, the game balls flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) can flow down to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage). Therefore, when more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number (the second and subsequent game balls T2) from staying in the first throwing path KR1. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second throwing path KR2) from being obstructed by the game ball stuck in the first throwing path KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a case where the ball is thrown into the throwing path when the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position will be described. 43 (a) and 43 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 40 (a). Further, FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, when the ball is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 arranged at the restricted position, the thrown game ball T1 is the first thrown ball. It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of the path KR1. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided by the second throwing path KR2 and flows down the second throwing path KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an operation when the ball is made to flow down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 40 (a). Further, FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, FIG. 44 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 44 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state (the state shown in FIG. 44 (a)), the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulated position. , The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flowed down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3.

That is, the flow of the ball into the third throwing path KR3 is limited to the ball stagnated above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, the number of balls stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the balls can flow down to the third throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 can be stabilized, it is possible to prevent an unintended number of balls from flowing down to the third throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the distribution member 540 (distribution means) has a regulation plate 541 (first appearance portion) and a regulation plate 541 (first appearance portion) formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path (first branch passage) due to the displacement of the distribution member 540. A storage plate (second haunting portion) is provided, and the regulation plate 541 projects a game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) into the second throwing path KR2 (second branch) by projecting to the third throwing path. The storage plate 542 is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the aisle), is located on the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 from the regulation plate 541, and is distributed to the third throwing path KR3 by projecting to the third throwing path KR3. The flow of the game ball is regulateably formed, and when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is outside the passage (recessed portion) of the third throwing path KR3. Since it is retracted to (inside of 518, 519), the distribution member 540 is displaced according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), so that only the specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be displaced to the third throwing path KR3. It can be distributed to and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

That is, the first state in which the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is distributed to the second throwing path due to the protrusion of the regulating plate 541, and the regulating plate 541 is retracted to flow down the first throwing path KR1. The second state of distributing the game ball to the third throwing path and the third state of restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 (storing the game ball) by projecting the second haunting portion. And by retracting the second haunting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third throwing path is allowed to flow down and be received by the ball receiving part. By combining the above, only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as a component of 1, the structure of the distribution member 540 (in order to operate the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exert their functions). Structure) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third throwing path KR3, so that there are two ball receiving portions 467. It suffices if the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution member 540 and the structure of displacement of the distribution member 540 with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game ball can be improved accordingly.

Next, the distribution unit 500 and the downward displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 46. FIG. 45 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 46 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. The state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side of FIG. 46) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at positions where they overlap in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolled on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 via the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is thrown to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes a rolling unit 525 that communicates with the orbital region of the ball receiving unit 467, and the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of the game ball in the rolling unit 525. Therefore, for example, the distribution member 540 may be used. Even if a malfunction occurs and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown, the second and subsequent game balls T2 are surely sent to the orbital region of the distribution member 540 via the rolling unit 525. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47, 49 and 51 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 48, 50 and 52 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In FIGS. 47, 49, and 51, the decorative member 450 of the displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 arranged on the front side is shown. Further, in FIGS. 48, 50 and 52, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back surface side is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 47 and 48, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position and the distribution member 540 is arranged in the regulated position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The positional state is illustrated. In FIGS. 49 and 50, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 51 and 52, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position and the distribution member 540 is arranged in the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The state located in is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the state where the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball receiving portion is as described above. The rack 466 that drives the 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and the movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is in a state of being arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) of the contact plate 464c is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (regulation position) where the regulation plate 541 is projected to the first throwing path KR1 by the driving force of rotation around the axis of the shaft hole 545.

Therefore, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without flowing down. Further, as described above, by displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which the ball is stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulated position, a game is played on the downstream side (downstream side of the storage plate 542) of the third throwing path KR3. You can throw a ball. At this time, by operating the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467.

The opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a for keeping the game ball in the distribution unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and the ball receiving portion 467 is the first. When displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game ball passing through the first throwing path KR1 is not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and the unintended game ball is the first. 3 It is possible to suppress the ball being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing path KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, since the regulation or allowance for throwing the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the sorting member can be switched according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the sorting member 540. It is possible to eliminate the need for control of the driving means or each of the driving means for driving the distribution member 540 according to the detection result of the 540, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation. Can be planned.

Further, the distribution member 540 sends the game ball T2 to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position to the first position direction (second direction). Therefore, the game ball can be reliably thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 and the region on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable at a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In the state where the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3, and in the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion is transferred from the third throwing path. Since the 467 can receive the game ball and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second throwing path KR2, the ball receiving unit 467 can receive the ball (1 ball in the present embodiment). It is possible to prevent the exceeded game ball from being distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving unit 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path. There is a risk that the game ball will be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 in excess of the specified number that can be received by the ball receiving unit 467. If a means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number of game balls (1 ball in the present embodiment) are distributed to the third throwing path KR3, the distribution member 540 is in the receiving position. When the ball is displaced to, the distribution destination is switched to the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball exceeding one ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third throwing path. Therefore, the ball receiving unit 467 can prevent the game balls exceeding the receivable specified number (1 ball) from being distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts from a position where each operating unit is turned off (turned off) when the power is turned on (on). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the stored state operates during the initial operation to cause the game ball to flow down to the third throwing path KR3. There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is not positioned at a predetermined reference position and the power is turned off, the pachinko machine is turned off. It is possible to prevent an unintended gaming ball from being thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 when the power of the machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged inside the lower displacement member 440.

Further, when the power is turned off while the game ball is left in the orbital region of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is left in the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform the discharge operation described above. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the second position or the third position (position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 49) of the lower displacement member 440, and the movable rack 464 is the lower displacement member 440. It is arranged at a movable position toward one end side from the end portion on the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 49).

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position separated from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 to one end. In this case, the other end surface (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) of the contact plate 464c is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is thrown into the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the first throwing path of the distribution unit 500 The ball thrown to the KR1 is in a state of being stopped above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2. ..

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is thrown into the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Will be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2. ..

That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the second overhanging state (a state other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 accompanies the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Since the position is displaced, the communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. Therefore, if the ball flows down into the third throwing path KR3, the ball may be discharged from the opening 451a into the rear case 300. However, in the present embodiment, the third throwing member is set as the storage position. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball of the rear case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed so as to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state, and when the displaced member 440 in the retracted state is positioned, it is located. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower displacement member 440, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state. It is possible to form a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 (third throwing path KR3). In such a state where the rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are not in communication), the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 is made unable to contact the distribution member 540. Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third throwing path. It is possible to suppress switching to KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is arranged on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the size of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is increased accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first overhanging state to the retracted state is not only rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also rotational displacement, the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is subjected to the rotational displacement. There is a possibility that the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 may come into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 may not be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the state of being displaced to the first overhanging position shown in FIG. 51 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at a position other than the first position. It is in a state of being displaced to (second position or third position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact plate 464c of the displacement member 440 displaced in the retracted state from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 from being unable to be rotationally displaced.

Further, since the swelling portion 543a is formed in the distribution member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c is formed. Even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c comes into contact with the contact plate 464c. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 from being unable to be rotationally displaced.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotary unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. 53 is a front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 54 is a rear view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 700, and FIG. 56 is an exploded view of the rotating unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the rotating unit 700 includes a decorative unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball pedestal 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of gravity, and the ball pedestal. The rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the 710 and the decorative unit 750, the left side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the front view of the decoration unit 750, and the right side transmission member arranged on the right side of the front view of the decoration unit 750. It is formed mainly with 740.

The ball pedestal 710 is a member for dropping a game ball emitted from an emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotating unit 700. The detailed configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and a character or a pattern is decorated on the front side. Further, the decorative unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a drive described later. The configuration of the decorative unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the back side of the decorative unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. As described above, since the decorative unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion thereof is limited, and the decorative unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 are on the back side at a position invisible to the player. By connecting and, the decoration unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of motion of the decoration unit 750.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 53) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and a drive motor KM4. It is mainly provided with a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. To.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decorative unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c thereof. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a rotational driving force to a right-side transmission member 740 on the right side of the decorative unit 750.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring arranged inside and a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, which becomes resistance and transmits power to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When rotated to, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, and the clutch slips and disconnects the power transmission.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft portion JB1 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, The outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is cut off.

Similar to the transmission gear 731b, the transmission gear 731c is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside. Further, a shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, and the inner ring when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4. On the other hand, the outer ring slips and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off. Further, the transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the rotation directions of the transmission gears 731c are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, it is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As mentioned above, the shaft 735 is rotated only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and rotation in the other direction is non-rotational.

The load gear 731e is connected to the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed to include a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the force for rotating the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a is also required to be a predetermined amount or more.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it is possible to suppress the rotation due to the inertial force thereof. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be limited to rotation in one direction for rotating the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the action of the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box shape in which the decorative unit 750 side is open, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged on the outside of the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 53) with the shaft inserted inside the box. Thereby, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be arranged inside the motor base 732. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be arranged in the decorative unit 750 in a state of being attached to the motor base 732, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decorative unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decorative unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 arranged between them. Further, in the decorative unit 750, a through hole 733a is formed through the decorative unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. A description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The ball throwing path cover 734 is a member arranged on the outside of the gear cover 733 (left side in FIG. 53), is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion protruding from the edge portion thereof toward the gear cover 733. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover 734 facing each other, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotating unit 700. Can be done. The ball discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover facing each other is thrown to a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 covers the rotating member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above, the arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742. It is mainly provided with a crank cover 743 arranged in the decorative unit 750 in the state of being formed.

The rotating member 741 has a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-shaped plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of the main body portion 741b, and a cylindrical columnar shape protruding on the opposite side (right side of FIG. 53) of the decorative unit 750. It is mainly provided with a protrusion 741a.

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when a rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotation speed higher than the rotation speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotation member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated to drive the rotation member 741 of the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape in which a C-shape and an I-shape in a side view are combined, and is formed by connecting the other end of the I-shape to one end of the C-shape. Further, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a penetrating the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetrating the one end of the I-shaped portion, and C. It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the character portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which the shaft portion 764a formed in the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decorative unit 750 because the shaft portion 764a is inserted into the shaft hole 742a and arranged in the decorative unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft is half the distance from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. It is placed at a position farther away than. As a result, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be reciprocated to rotate around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which the protrusion 773a of the right side lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a. Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Further, the right side lid portion 773 is formed so as to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation to rotate the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an elliptical portion 743a formed in a rear view ellipse and a ball throwing portion 743b formed so as to be connected to the back surface side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and the outer shape in the side view is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 is formed from the edge portion to the decorative unit 750 side. A wall portion is formed that protrudes larger than the thickness of the wall. Thereby, when the crank cover 743 is arranged in the decorative unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decorative unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing unit 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the collection path when the ball flowing down in the flow area in front of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in the shape of a rod with a space of sword. Further, the upper end side of the ball throwing portion 743b is opened and connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decorative unit 750. As a result, the ball collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the inside of the decorative unit 750 via the ball throwing unit 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decorative unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. FIG. 57 is a front view of the decorative unit 750. 58 (a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of arrow LVIIIa of FIG. 57, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of arrow LVIIIb of FIG. 57. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative unit 750, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative unit 750. In addition, in FIG. 57 (b) and FIG. 57 (c), the right side side plate 764 and the left side side plate 765 of the box member 760 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the decorative unit 750 has a lid arranged on the upper side (upper side of FIG. 57 (a)) of the box member 760 and the box member 760, which are the outer decorative portions of the decorative unit 750. The member 770 is mainly provided with a rotating body 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, and a lower surface plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is mainly provided with a right side side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the front view of the base member 762 and a left side side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the front view of the base member 762.

The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 in the top view, and has a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed on a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. As a result, when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800, the collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 is mainly provided with a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The recess 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is arranged, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of the decorative unit 750. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing portion 762b is bent and recessed in an L shape on the bottom surface, one end side is connected to the opening 764b of the right side plate 764, and the other end side is the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. Is linked to. Further, the recessed width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw the ball inside the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed so as to be horizontally long in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size capable of inserting a ball on the front side. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back surface side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown inside the winning opening 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape whose outer shape is curved upward in the side view. Further, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a projecting to the outside of the decorative unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed through below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same shaft as the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d is formed in the opening, an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743, and a semicircular side view formed on the axis of the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. It is mainly provided with an engaging portion 764e.

The opening 764b is a hole for allowing the ball thrown from the ball throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to be thrown to the base member 762, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-mentioned right side transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a projecting from the right lid portion 773 is inserted into the inside. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d from colliding with each other when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the end portion on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 to hold the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e and arranged. As a result, the base plate 810 is made non-rotatable.

The left side surface plate 765 is formed so that the outer shape in the side view is substantially the same as that of the right side surface plate 764. Further, the left side surface plate 765 has a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a penetrating portion 791a into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. It is mainly provided with a hole 765c.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800 into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and the size of the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in the rotation restricting member 780 described later, and can hold the rotation regulating member 780 in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

As described above, the through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 to form a ball throwing path through which the ball can pass through the ball throwing portion 762b and the lower surface plate 763 of the base member 762. Further, the lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing portion 762b into a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing portion 743b of the right side transmission member 740, and the ball can be discharged from the inside of the decorative unit 750.

The lid member 770 has a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 in front view, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly provided with a left side lid portion 772 to be fastened to the left side surface of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has an outer shape in a side view formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed with a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate in a part on the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize a pattern, a character, or the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, even if the rotating body 800 has the upper end side covered with the lid member 770, the player can visually recognize the display of the rotating body 800 through the transparent portion 771a.

The right side lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outer side of the annulus is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer diameter in the side view of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800. As a result, the right lid portion 773 is arranged with the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the right side lid portion 773 is formed mainly provided with a protrusion 773a projecting to the outside (right side in the front view) of the decorative unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed in the outer peripheral edge portion in the radial direction. .. As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the decorative unit 750 second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

The opening / closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the recessed width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 in which the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left side lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outer side of the annular shape is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left side lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotation portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left side lid portion 772 is arranged in a state where the left rotation portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the decorative unit 750. The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by arranging the sensor plate 772a between facing the bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is the state in which the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right side lid portion 773 and the left side lid portion 772 before assembly (separate member). do. Then, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right side lid portion 773, the left side lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable with respect to the rotating body about the axis of the rotating body 800.

The rotation restricting member 780 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding toward one end in the bending direction, and a contact surface 783 formed flat at the tip on the other end side. Will be done.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side surface plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. As a result, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side surface plate 765. Further, the urging spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 can regulate the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. The contact surface 783 is a surface to which the end portion on the back surface side of the above-mentioned lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by abutting the lid member 770. The mode of regulation between the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, the transmission path of the driving force when the driving motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 61 (a) and 62 (a) are the rotating unit 700 in the direction of arrow LVa of FIG. 55, and FIGS. 61 (b) and 62 (b) are the rotating unit 700 in the arrow LVb of FIG. 55. be.

In FIG. 61, the displacement direction of each member when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is shown by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 62, when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the displacement direction of each member is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is in the transmitted state.

As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates around the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in the non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 makes a negative rotation, the driving force to the lid member 770 is in a transmitted state, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) that transmits the drive force to the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770. Further, by disposing the one-way clutch OW1, the rotational force can be transmitted to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and the transmission to the other can be cut off according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. .. As a result, the drive target driven by the rotational drive force can be switched only by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, that is, the rotation of the rotating body 800 and its rotation according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. The stop can be switched between the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 and the stop thereof, and the structure can be simplified while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body 800 or opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770)) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means using the one-way clutch OW1, the drive force is transmitted from the drive motor KM4. When the circuit is cut off, the rotation or displacement in the direction driven by the driving force becomes free. Therefore, for example, the driving target of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is cut off. However, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. 63 (a) and 64 (c) are in the closed state, FIGS. 63 (b) and 64 (b) are in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 63 (c) and 64 (a) are in the open state. It is a side view of the decorative unit 750 and the right side transmission member 740.

In addition, in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c) and 64 (a) to 64 (c), the state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed is shown. Further, the closed state of the decorative unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged so as to cover the upper half surface (upper side of FIG. 63 (a)) of the rotating body 800, and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 rotates. It is in a state of being displaced and arranged on the back surface side (right side of FIG. 63 (c)) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged at a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c), the states of being displaced from the closed state to the open state are sequentially illustrated, and in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is shown. The states to be displacement are shown in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 63, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The transmission of the driving force to the arm member 742 is performed by rotating the driving motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the back surface side (right side of FIG. 63A) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the back surface side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 63A) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 741a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed. With the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 63B).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 63B) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed at a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back surface side of the rotating body 800. ..

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a columnar shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 so that the outer ring can rotate in advance of the inner ring. Therefore, the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped by the load of the lid member 770. The lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the intermediate state. That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 63) of the displacement region of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by the operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and the operation of loading and dropping the lid member 770.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the section for driving the drive motor KM4 can be halved from the entire section, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Further, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set to follow the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failure can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section, the displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and the first section is designated by the reference numeral DK1. Will be described with reference to DK2 in the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 64 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, and the curved lid of the lid member 770 is arranged. It is assumed that the portion 771 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 741a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed. With the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 64B).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side (upper side of FIG. 64B) of the shaft hole 742a in the gravity direction. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced upward by approximately 45 degrees from the state where the curved lid portion 771 is positioned on the back surface side of the rotating body 800. It is said that it is placed in the position where it was made.

Further, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (position in FIG. 63 (a)) is arranged in the game area (front side of the game board 13) and is located in the open position (FIG. 63 (c)). The lid member 770 displaced to the position of) is arranged outside the area of the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800. In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, so that the gaming machine flowing down the gaming area collides with the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being opened (overhanging).

Further, since the lid member 770 is arranged outside the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position provides a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area. Can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side by that amount, and the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player.

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed around an axis substantially parallel to the axis of rotation of the rotating body 800, and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, so that the lid member 770 is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (embossed position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. Further, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved shape in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from being stopped on the lid member 770 arranged at the closed position, and to make it smooth. Can be made to flow down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 71a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is generated. Is displaced to the back surface side (right side of FIG. 64 (c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a as the protrusion 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 64C) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, in the middle of the intermediate state to the closed state, the load of the lid member 770 exerts a rotational force in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770, the lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotation member 741 has one rotation direction and the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that it is possible to suppress the stop position of the lid member 770 from shifting. can.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so that when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of such a displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to increase the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which increases the product cost and control cost. Invite. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) includes the one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 becomes the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when the inner ring is displaced in one direction, the roller engages with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit the driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and the outer ring The engagement of the roller with the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is attached to the inner ring. Since it is displaced in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other section regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. .. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the lid member 770.

Further, regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be preceded by the inner ring in one direction. Therefore, for example, the drive motor KM4 can be driven at a constant drive speed in the entire section of the displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the roller is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, so that the displacement member is in the stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be used as the driving force for driving the rotating body 800. That is, the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be displaced by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4).

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction, the outer ring can be displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the transmission of the driving force protrudes from the main body portion 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached and the main body portion 741b, and the protrusion 741a (pin portion) located displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c. Since it is performed by the rotating member 741 (crank member) and the arm member 742, the rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a is slid along the first sliding groove 742b. The other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both reciprocating movements, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, even when it is displaced in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the effect of the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described. FIG. 65 (a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the open state. In addition, in FIG. 65A and FIG. 65B, the state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65A, when the lid member 770 is closed, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the urging force of the urging spring SP5 (FIG. 65). In (a), the state is rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4). <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is made rotatable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has a lid member 770 in which the contact surface 783 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body 800. It is considered that the contact surface 783 is in contact with the contact surface and is pushed down (in FIG. 65 (b), the contact surface 783 is rotated counterclockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6). <L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in which the engaging projection 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowermost position in the direction of gravity, the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging projection 882. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 800 is made non-rotatable. In this embodiment, the position where the rotating body 800 cannot be rotated (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in the open state. Is set to.

That is, in the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when the rotating body 800 is ejected, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 overhanging, and the opening / closing member 870 interferes with other members located on the rotation locus. It can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by arranging the first member in the lining position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to make the player visually recognize it.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) can be regulated when the lid member 770 (first member) is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect can be ensured. That is, when the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. It is used as a means to regulate the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 67). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape in which the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is located at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 is displaced to the closed position by the gravity of the rotating body 800 due to rotation (may be rotated) around the center of rotation. It is particularly effective that the lid member 770 is formed so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of effect can be ensured.

The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically with respect to the axis. In this case, by forming the rotating body 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the position of the center of gravity thereof can be arranged at a position different from the axis of rotation. For example, by forming one half surface from a metal material and the other half surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be generally positioned on the metal material side having a larger specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 66 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction of the arrow LXVIb of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 66 (c) is a side view of the rotating body 800. It is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction view of the arrow LXVIc of FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the rotating body 800 is formed into a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 has a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 arranged so as to surround the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display unit 860, a right-handed rotating portion 89 arranged at one end in the axial direction, a left-handed rotating portion 880 arranged at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening / closing member arranged inside the first display unit 830. It is formed mainly with 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section in the axial direction and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to include a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 protruding outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 66A). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly provided with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b that is an inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 811a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding region in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 66 (c)) is inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. It is set smaller than the area of. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side surface plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (cover member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810. This makes it possible to insert the wiring.

The left end portion 812 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 66A). The left end portion 812 is formed mainly provided with a tip portion 812a protruding from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812 and a communication hole 812b at the inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 812a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and the protruding shape in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 66B) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the inside of the rotating body 800 by the opening / closing member 870 described later to the outside of the rotating body 800. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set to be larger than that of the sphere, and is set to be substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance in contact with the through hole 733a. Further, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be substantially the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is arranged on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 in a rotatable state. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a protrusion 813a inclined to one end side is formed. Further, the reverse rotation prevention member 813 is provided with an urging spring SP6 between the base plate 810 and the base plate 810, whereby the protrusion 813a is always urged to the left side in the front view (left side in FIG. 66A). It is said that.

The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed in the shape of a plate having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810. As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotation portion 890. Further, the right-handed rotating portion 890 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around the shaft hole 891.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 described later is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 872. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance to the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870. As a result, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is formed in the shape of a plate having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the counterclockwise rotating portion 880. Further, the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 protruding from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Formed in preparation.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to project to the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding tip, and has a communication hole 881b that opens inward. The tooth surface 881a is meshed with the transmission gear 881d as described above. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 can be discharged by opening the opening / closing member 870 described later.

As described above, the engaging protrusion 882 is a protrusion to which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed so as to project from the side surface on the left side of the front view of the counterclockwise rotating portion 880. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 is formed so as to be insertable between them.

The cross section of the locking portion 883 is formed in a serrated shape. When the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is arranged on the base plate 810, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is in contact with the locking portion 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the protrusion 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to rotate the left rotating portion 880. When a rotational force that rotates the left-handed rotating portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to regulate that the rotating body 800 is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. Therefore, for example, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is biased or the game ball. It is possible to prevent the rotating body from rotating in the reverse direction due to a collision or the like.

Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and by connecting the end faces of each other, it can be formed into one annular shape. Further, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating units 880 and 890. Thereby, by arranging the display units 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating units 880 and 890, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 can be formed into one columnar shape.

In addition, characters and patterns are drawn on the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860, respectively, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880 to rotate the characters. And patterns can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 is mainly provided with an opening 831 opened on the curved surface thereof and a bearing portion 832 which is open to the shaft side and is formed so as to project in a U shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, is arranged, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening / closing member 870. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size such that the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 can be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830. The displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 can emit the LED light mounted on the LED board 820 by supplying electric power. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69A is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870. FIG. 69B is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870. In FIG. 69, when the opening / closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is shown by a chain line.

The closed state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

As shown in FIG. 69 (a), in the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (the shaft in FIG. 69 (a)). It is located on the lower side of the portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69B, in the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890. That is, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 is performed by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right-handed rotating portion 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. 70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the decorative unit 750. In addition, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, in FIG. 70A, a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the closed state is shown. FIG. 70B shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 70A, when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer edge of the right lid 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871. When the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis on the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

Further, the difference in dimensions between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore, in a state where the outer edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced to one end side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decorative unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the decorative unit 750 is opened, the recess 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced with the displacement of the right lid portion 773. In this case, the protrusion 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. As a result, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 to the open state can be performed according to the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose the drive source for driving the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of different driving means, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. And the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that interference between the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the tip end side of the rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. As a result, the ball thrown from the throwing portion 711c of the ball cradle 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

In this case, the rotation tip side of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the sphere that falls on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800. The game ball that is rolled inside the rotating body 800 is rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end portion 812 side and rotated from the inside thereof. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing the effect, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by further displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective to configure the lid member 770 displaced to the open position so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. And the effect of production can be secured.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around a rotation axis is arranged so as to be visible to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer surface thereof. .. That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the occupied space is large, the part other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed inside the rotating body 800 to the outside, and also has an opening 831 and a communication hole 881b formed so that the game ball can pass through. (Communication port) is provided, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped, there is little change in the effect mode and the effect is insufficient. There was a problem that it was.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface is formed as the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the effect mode in which the display of the above is visually recognized by the player, an effect mode in which the opening / closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the effect mode can be changed accordingly and the effect effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870, so that the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be changed. The size can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 arranged at the closed position, and the opening / closing member 870 is arranged (displaced) at the open position when the rotation is stopped, so that the rotating body 800 can be used as an outer surface. The portion (opening / closing member 870) that has been visually recognized can form a mode in which the rotating body 800 protrudes outward in the radial direction, and the interest can be enhanced.

Further, an LED board 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a drive means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870, and the product cost. Is bulky. Further, if the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced according to the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The rotating body 800 can be rotated and the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced by using the KM4 in combination. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for the game ball to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b is used. Can be used as an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. That is, the rotating body 800 can be utilized as a throwing passage for a game ball without rotating the rotating body 800 (rotating member) (while maintaining the stopped state).

Further, since the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed on the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the game ball into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) can be formed. The inflow can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is kept in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is arranged so as to be visible to the player, an opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface thereof, so that the inflow of the game ball can be easily made visible to the player. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotation position where the communication hole 881b is above, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating body 800.

Further, a displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is arranged inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is opened. When the opening / closing member 870 is shielded and the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of the game ball through the opening 831 is switched between the shielded state and the allowable state. be able to.

Further, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 by using the opening / closing member 870.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the rotating body 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, if the opening / closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. .. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so that the rotation restricting member 780 is displaced so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated, whereby the opening / closing member 870 is played. It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the area is overhanging at a predetermined position.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged on the rotation direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) with respect to the other side. Therefore, when the rotating body 800 is rotated, even if the opening / closing member 870 interferes with the member arranged around the rotating member, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displacement to the closed position). Can act in the direction of). That is, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the overhang (second position) by interfering with other members when the rotating body 800 is rotated. Further, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from engaging with other members and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is non-rotating with respect to the box member 760 (base member) in which the rotating body 800 is rotatably arranged. By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with the members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

As described above, in the rotating body 800, the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810 is inserted is opposite to the end surface of the rotating body 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. It is formed on the end face of. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, in the case of electrical wiring to the LED board arranged inside the rotating body 800, when the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the axial end surface of the rotating body is used. Where it is preferable to wire from the above, if the opening through which the game ball flows and the opening through which the game ball flows out are formed on both end faces in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, it becomes difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface thereof, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other is the insertion of wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, it is easy to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. 71 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 700, and FIG. 72 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the direction of the arrow LXXII of FIG. 71. In addition, in FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 72), the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball cradle 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a mode of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating unit 700 will be described. FIG. 73 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotary unit 700. Note that FIG. 73 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 73, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the ball receiving portion 467 arranged inside the lower displacement member 440 is in a state of receiving the ball inside (ball receiving operation). When the firing operation is performed in the state), as described above, the ball arranged inside the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440.

The ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls and falls on the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 (a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 74 (b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 74 (c) is the LXXIVc-LXXIVc of FIG. 74 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball cradle 710 in line. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the ball cradle 710 is connected to the dish receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape, the solenoid 712 arranged inside the dish receiving portion 711, and the solenoid 712. The displacement member 713 and the cover member 714 that covers the solenoid 712 are mainly provided.

The dish receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright portion 711b erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 711d formed through the erection portion 711b erected at the edge portion of the above.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that bends downward toward the throwing portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the throwing portion 711c by its deflection (inclination).

Further, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material, and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (the lower surface of FIG. 74 (c)) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. As a result, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of heat shrinkage can be made different between the upper surface and the bottom surface, so that the bottom plate can be easily bent toward the bottom surface side. That is, it becomes difficult for a force to act on the bottom surface to which the textured surface is applied in a direction in which the bottom plate side is convexly curved when heat shrinks due to unevenness. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed on a flat surface, a pulling force in the horizontal direction acts when the heat shrinks, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, when the ball is thermally shrunk, it can be easily bent in a direction in which the ball is likely to roll. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when it is molded.

The upright portion 711b is a wall portion that is erected on the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 74 (c)) from the outer edge portion of the ball throwing portion 711c. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge portion thereof. In this embodiment, the vertical dimension of the vertical portion 711b is set to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

Further, the upright portion 711b is formed by connecting the central upright portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two to the upright portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper region of the bottom plate 711a into a region where a ball is thrown on one side and a region where a solenoid 712, which will be described later, is arranged on the other side.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 74 (a)) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 74) of the substantially center position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the throwing portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the throwing portion 711c. A winning opening 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 72), and a ball falling from the throwing section 711c can be thrown into the winning opening 761a.

The shaft portion 713a of the displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. As a result, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

When electric power is applied to the solenoid 712, the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 can be displaced by the piston. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to the displacement member 713 described later, and the communication hole 712a1 is formed through the tip thereof.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and is mainly provided with a protrusion 713b projecting outward of the C-shape at one end thereof and a shaft portion 713a projecting inward of the C-shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. As a result, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a, and is fastened and fixed to the dish receiving portion 711. As a result, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, a ball falling on the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. 76 (a) and 76 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. Note that FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball cradle 710 of FIG. 74 (c).

As shown in FIG. 76, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the rotation unit 700 side (right side in FIG. 76 (a)) due to the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467. ). That is, it is dropped in the lower right direction of the front view with respect to the bottom plate 711a of the ball cradle 710.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed by bending downward toward the ball throwing portion 711c side, and the ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a, so that the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls is formed. Can be an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be brought close to each other in parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), it is possible to prevent the ball that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a from bouncing upward (upward in FIG. 76 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball pedestal 710 of the rotating unit 700 from falling from the ball pedestal 710.

Further, the ball that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the throwing portion 711c by the force of the fall. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the throwing unit 711c can be shortened. As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball cradle 710 can be smoothly thrown.

Next, the light emission of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 700 in the LXXVII-LXXVII line of FIG. 53. It should be noted that FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in a closed state, and FIG. 77 (b) shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is arranged in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the light emission to the ball cradle 710 in the state where the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the closed state is performed by the LED base 721 arranged on the back side of the rear base 720. ..

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is reflected on the back surface side of the lid member 770 so as to be incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball cradle 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, it is possible to diffusely reflect the incident light due to the unevenness of the textured processing. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the ball cradle 710 can be made to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77B, when the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LED 721a of the LED board 721 can be used. It is not reflected by the lid member 770 and is transmitted. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, it can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and incident on the ball cradle 710.

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display unit 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball cradle 710 side (upper side in FIG. 77B), light is emitted from the LED 821 of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810. The light can be reflected on the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective of the upper displacement unit 900. It should be noted that FIGS. 78 to 80 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, the upper displacement unit 900 is arranged inside the base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and the base member 910 thereof. The transmission member 920, the rotary member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced due to the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 and the rotary member 930. It is mainly provided with an upper displacement member 940 that is connected to and displaced by transmitting a driving force from the rotating member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a back base 912 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction on the paper in FIG. 78), a shaft support pin 911b protruding to the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and one end side of the front base. It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 911f projecting to the front (on the left side when viewed from the front) and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged in the front base 911 to the back surface side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed through the axis of the shaft support pin 911b in an arc shape. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc thereof is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. As a result, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted inside the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin from colliding with the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pins 951 and 952. Will be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the front view) of the front base 911. On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed in a non-parallel manner. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance dimensions between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are different. As a result, when the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the facings in the vertical direction. To.

The shaft portion 911f is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, to hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at predetermined intervals. The back base 912 is made of a metallic material. This makes it possible to improve the overall rigidity of the base member 910. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 910 from twisting when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is arranged on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape.

The transmission member 920 is arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922. Is formed.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. As a result, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed so as to have a shaft support pin 923a projecting to the front side on the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 mainly includes a through hole 931 formed in the shape of a long rod on one side and penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end, and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Formed in preparation.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911 by inserting the shaft portion 911f. Can be retained. Further, an urging spring SP8 is arranged at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. As a result, the rotating member 930 is urged in the direction of lifting the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911.

The opening 923 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the shaft support pin 923a is displaced, the shaft support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 923. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged in a state where one end is rotatably supported by the shaft, the rotating member 930 is rotated about one end by the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 formed in a front view annular shape and formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness is arranged on the back surface side.

The front side of the annulus member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected to each other, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotary member 930 is rotationally displaced.

The protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a due to the rotational displacement of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member. can.

Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first open portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 formed from a plate-shaped body are arranged in front of the rotating member 930. The shaft portion cover 913 is arranged in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930, so that the rotating member 930 is prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation control cover 914 is arranged at a position separated from the rotation axis by a predetermined distance, and it is possible to suppress the rotation member 930 from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first open portions 960 rotatably arranged on the back surface side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It is mainly provided with two second open portions 970 rotatably arranged on the front side and a variable portion 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 is mainly provided with two shaft support pins 951 and 952 projecting on the back surface on one end side and a shaft portion 953 projecting on the back surface on the other end side.

The shaft support pins 951 and 952 are protrusions inserted into the sliding grooves 911e and 911d of the front base 911 as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, when the rotary member 930 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first open portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the back surface side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Further, the first open portion 960 has a protrusion 961 that protrudes to the back surface side and is arranged inside the sliding groove 933a of the annular member 933. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 961 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved shaft of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotating shaft of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Also. The second open portion 970 is formed to include an engaging projection (not shown) with which the first open portion 960 engages when a predetermined displacement is made. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first open portion 960 engages with the second open portion 970. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. 81 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 82 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at an intermediate position. FIG. 83 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the overhanging position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is a position in which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (on the right side of the front view of the front base 911). Is. The overhanging position is a position in which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are arranged on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (on the left side of the front view of the front base 911). Further, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 81 left-right direction) to a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 81 left-right direction). (Fig. 83 Vertical direction).

Further, with the rotational displacement, the position on one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the position of the right end portion in the front view of the front base 911 to the substantially center position in the front view. That is, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced.

Further, when the displacement is performed from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 82 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 83, the first open portion 960 arranged in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second open portion 970, which engages with and displaces the rotational displacement of the first open portion 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed to the vertical direction, and the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 are displaced.

In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, the displacement from the first position to the third position causes the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 to be displaced, so that the player can visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a detailed description of the variable portion 980 will be given. 84 (a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 84 (b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and the main body portion 981 and the main body portion 981 forming the rear portion of the hand are formed. It is mainly provided with finger portions 982 to 986 which are connected to form a finger portion of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the main body 981, and the variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be displaced in the front-rear direction (up and down direction in FIG. 84 (a)). Will be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base portion side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed mainly including a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side inside the finger portions 983 to 986.

The first link RB1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB2 at the tip end side and is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981 at the base portion side. Therefore, the variable plate of the main body 981 is subjected to the piston movement, so that the second link RB2 can be displaced via the first link RB1 and the first link RB1. As a result, the fingers 983 to 986 can be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the fingers 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction on the paper in FIG. 11), two columnar shaft support pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a shaft support pin 411d. It is mainly provided with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape about the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend long in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, by displacing the protrusions 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, and are upward (upward in FIG. 11) from the left end (left side in FIG. 11) to the right end (right side in FIG. 11) of the front base 411. ) Is opened. Further, in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the axes of the respective arcs are arranged at different positions, and the gap between the facing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with the sliding without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411c from being broken (damaged) when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction.

Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. In the first embodiment, the case where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 has been described, but the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 86 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that FIG. 86 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably arranged between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. Left-right direction (Fig. 86 left-right direction) A protruding wall 477 that protrudes from the upper end of the central part to the front side in a U-shape that is opposite to the vertical direction, a shaft part 474, 475 that protrudes to the front side, and a shaft part 474. It is mainly provided with shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member rotatably supported by the transmission gear 2468a described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member to which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state where the gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is set to the distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and has a transmission gear 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 that is slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, and a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a. It is mainly provided with a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b and a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 466.

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end surface. Is mainly formed.

The rack gear 2464 g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated according to the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a state of being in mesh with each other as described above. As a result, when the transmission gear 2468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Further, the transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are arranged at positions partially displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468b is suppressed from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. In FIG. 87, similarly to FIG. 86, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 87, when power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the launch position by the transmission mechanism 2460 described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions from each other. Displacement.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 87) of the lower displacement member 440. Along with this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

Next, the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slidly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidly displaced by the link mechanism. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 88 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 91 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that FIG. 91 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 91 (b) shows the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 transparently. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and a base. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably arranged between the member 3470 and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. The sliding wall 3470c, which is formed continuously from the base end side of the erection wall 471a and is erected on the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 88 (a) left-right direction). Mainly provided with a protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction from the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed in the central portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction while extending from one end side to the other end side. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion for abutting with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulating the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467c. That is, it is formed so as to project to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held in a state where the opening of the U-shaped portion faces upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c is formed with a recess 3470c1 recessed below the end portion on the standing wall 471a side. The recess 3470c1 is a groove for receiving the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 into the recess 3470c1. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the upright portion by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be made to perform a firing operation (an operation of discharging the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 is attached to a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480 described later, a first link member 3468 connected to a shaft of the drive motor KM2 and rotatably arranged, and the first link member 3468 thereof. It is mainly provided with a second link member 3469 connected in a rotatable state and a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of the second link member 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular oblong plate-like body, has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and bulges toward the other end side. It is mainly provided with a load portion 3468c to be formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which the rotation shaft 3469a of the second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469a.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is internally fitted and fastened to the connecting hole 3468a, so that the first link member 3468 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM2.

The load portion 3468c is formed so as to bulge toward the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed so as to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular oblong state and is arranged on the back surface side of the first link member 3468. The second link member 3469 is mainly provided with a rotating shaft 3469a projecting in a columnar shape from the other end side toward the front surface and a through hole 3469b formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. As a result, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width in the lateral direction of the opening 469 is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. Is inserted and fastened to the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving portion 467 is connected to the second link member in a rotatable state.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and back of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in front view, and has an opening 3481d penetrating at a position facing the drive motor KM2, a bottom wall portion 481b formed so as to project from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 to the back side, and is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. 92 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and FIG. 92 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. FIG. 93 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

In addition, from FIG. 92 (a) to FIG. 93 (b), the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 is shown in order. Further, FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) or FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b) show a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are transparently viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 92 (a) left-right direction). The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction while being in a state substantially parallel to the direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 92A).

That is, the connecting portion with the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 92A) of the base member 3470. As a result, the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92B, when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470. Displaced with respect to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is the base member 3470. It is pushed out to the other end side of. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93A, when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated by approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , The connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the urging spring SP2 and fired.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93B, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so that the lower displacement member 3440 tends to rattle, and the ball receiving portion 467 is quickly retracted. Therefore, the rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, by immediately displacementing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejection operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be able to launch is described, but the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is the lower displacement member arranged in the retracted state. The firing operation of 440 is restricted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 94, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 94, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 94, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has an opening opened in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

The tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

On the front base 411, an engaging wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape continuous with the bottom surface of the collection port 411f is formed.

The engaging wall 4411g can regulate that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position (launching operation) by inserting the tip portion 4411g1 bent into a substantially L shape into the opening 4471b. .. That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. 95 and 96 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. In addition, in FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed is shown as in FIG. 94, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 95, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position is shown. Further, in FIG. 96, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 abuts on the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, and the recess 481b1 or the opening Invasion into 4471b is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted.

Therefore, when the ball received on the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the third position. Can be prevented from rotating and ejecting the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) are discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position in the first overhanging state (the position other than the position in the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

That is, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) is discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is possible to suppress the change and make it easier to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds a specified number of game balls, while engaging when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second overhanging positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the internal space of the opening 4471b, the leg portion 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is possible to easily discharge a specified number of game balls from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulated state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulated state. do. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. 97 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 97 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 5500 along the line CC of FIG. 97 (a). In FIG. 100, the outer shape of the distribution member 550 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment has a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and faces the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a ball can flow, a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520, and a base plate that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520. It is mainly provided with an extension path member 530 that extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the 5520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 has two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding to the back surface side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the shape of a rectangle, and a U-shaped cross section in which the upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly provided with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back surface side.

The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to project two on the back surface side, and is inserted into each of the two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 5542 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later, are inserted, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the slide direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 is a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole having a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 protruding to the front side in a plate shape and a long hole substantially in the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. And a locking portion 544 formed in the shape of a hook on the back surface side.

The regulation plate 5541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 via the first opening 5521, and the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is the second throwing path KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the inflow to the first opening 5521, and the distance protruding from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. As a result, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement region of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening region of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 5522 and allowing the game ball flowing down the second throwing path KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542. The distance protruding from the opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. As a result, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement region of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening region of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed through in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the sliding groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back surface side, the distribution member 5540 is held in a state where it can be slidably displaced with respect to the base plate 5520. be able to.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations, and their respective longitudinal directions are formed in parallel. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. 101 (a) and 101 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 5500 in the range CI of FIG. 100. Note that FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulated position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third throwing path KR3, and the regulating plate 5541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 5542 and the inner wall of the third throw path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the restricted position, the restriction plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3. , The regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510. To.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 5541 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulated position and the storage position, the ball thrown in the first throwing path KR1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to form a state in which a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3 and is thrown into the second throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by sliding-displaceting one distribution member 5540, it is possible to reliably switch the flow path of the sphere to either of the flow paths when the flow path is divided into the flow path of 1 and the flow path of 2.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is the first. 1 It is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the throwing path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 5541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 5541.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the above, the game ball can be pushed into the second throwing path KR with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, the rotary unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by the inertial force has been described. However, the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment has a load. The gear 731e is removed. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotary unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. 102 is a front view of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 6700. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the rotating unit 6700 includes a decorative unit 6750 provided with a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball pedestal 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and the ball pedestal. The rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the 710 and the decorative unit 6750, the left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the front view of the decoration unit 6750, and the crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the front view of the decoration unit 6750. And is formed mainly with.

The decorative unit 6750 is mainly formed by including a box member 760 formed in a box shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is opened, and a rotating body 800 rotatably arranged inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the decorative unit 750 is formed in a state where the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the lid member 770 is removed. The closure.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 102) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and a drive motor KM4. Mainly, the motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. Formed in preparation.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission gear 731d which is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 731c. In the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force for rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force in the other direction is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. The outer ring slips (spins) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. 105 (a) to 105 (c) are side views of the decorative unit 6750 in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104, and FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (c) are views of the arrow CV direction of FIG. 104. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in.

In addition, in FIGS. 105 and 106, the state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is transparently shown is shown. Further, in FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (c), the mode in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the second section DK2 is sequentially shown, and in FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (c), the rotating body is shown. The mode in which the center of gravity G of 800 displaces the first section DK1 is sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 105, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced in the left direction (viewing in the direction of FIG. 105) and clockwise (clockwise).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically around the axis of rotation, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the axis of rotation. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 106 (a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 106 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When it starts, a force that rotates in the direction of rotation is applied by the load.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). It is in a state of being driven. That is, in the second section, the rotation speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 under the load is rotated by the load to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 105 (c) is located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the effect of the effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased) by its own weight has been described. The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to lead the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to the inner ring (that is, to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

107 and 108 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 107 schematically shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 108 schematically shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the displacement unit 7700 transmits the rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710 formed so as to be slidable and the displacement member 7710. The transmission member 7720 and the load gear 7730 rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported in a linear displacement along the virtual line L1 by a support mechanism (not shown), and is mounted on a driven pin 7711 projecting from the side surface of the displacement member 7710 and a lower surface of the displacement member 7710. It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 engraved along the virtual line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that inclines downward from the ascending position shown in FIG. 107 toward the descending position shown in FIG. 108. That is, in the ascending position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above the descending position in the direction of gravity.

The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the drive groove 7723b in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation shaft 7713a, the standing state shown in FIG. 107 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 108 can be obtained. It can be formed. In the upright state, one end side is projected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 109). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 110).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the descending position, the engaging pin is on the other end side of the ball receiving member 7713. When the 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and put into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the ascending position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring to return to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by a driving means (not shown) described above, and is projected from the axial end face of the rotating member 7721 and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating member 7721. It mainly includes a columnar drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 in which a driven groove 7723a through which the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted is formed.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner ring is connected to the drive means, the outer ring is connected to the rotating member 7721, and the inner ring is rotationally driven by the drive means in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107). When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 107). , The power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

In the arm member 7723, a drive groove 7723b through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted is formed on the other end side opposite to the one end side on which the driven groove 7723a is formed. At the same time, the space between the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b (intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 7723c.

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the arrow A direction (clockwise in FIG. 107) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the ascending position shown in FIG. 107. , The drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 107 about the rotation shaft 7723c. With the clockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced along the virtual line L1 and is displaced in FIG. 108. It is placed in the descending position shown in.

On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the descending position shown in FIG. 108, the drive pin 7722 is moved into the driven groove 7723a. By acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 107 about the rotation shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the virtual line L1. It is arranged in the ascending position shown in 107.

Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating, similar to the load gear 731e in the first embodiment. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 to rotate the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107), so that the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is relative to the inner ring. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from leading in one direction (arrow A direction). That is, in the state where the game ball is not held, it is possible to suppress that the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position is increased.

That is, while the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 107 and 108) by the rotational driving force of the driving means, it is displaced at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means. The member 7710 is reciprocally displaced (sliding displacement) between the ascending position and the descending position.

FIGS. 109 and 110 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. Note that FIG. 109 schematically shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 110 schematically shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the displacement member 7710 is formed on the upper surface thereof so as to be able to hold the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to receive the flowing game ball on the upper surface thereof. In addition, in FIG. 109, a state in which four game balls represented by reference numeral T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 is exemplified.

In this case, in the state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance due to the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made to. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 109) to rotate the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can be preceded in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 107).

Further, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be made different according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be changed (changed) not only depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710, but also depending on the number of the game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with a ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the force applied to the displacement member 7710 from the game ball is slid toward the descending position. It can act as a force to displace. That is, the applied force can be applied to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

As a result, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the flowing game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide the displacement member 7710 in the descending position. The displacement speed of displacement can be made faster.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flow directions and flow speeds. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be made different according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 differs (changes) depending on not only whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710 and the number of the game balls held, but also the flow state of the game ball. Can be). As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotation direction of the rotating member 7721 is unidirectional, it is not necessary to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time for switching the drive direction of the drive means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that the switching of the driving means is not required.

In this case, by immediately displacementing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced due to the reaction when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710. It is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member 7710.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction caused by the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 exerts a force for displacing the displacement member 7710 downward to cancel the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves along the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13 in the direction of gravity, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, a tulip, an object, etc. and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or a game ball that rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding the game ball (see FIG. 107), the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the descending position. The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is configured so as not to precede the inner ring in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the descending position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced with respect to the inner ring. It may be configured to precede in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, even when only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 becomes the inner ring. On the other hand, it may be preceded.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114. On the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. 111 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 113 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 on the CXIII-CXIII line of FIG. 111.

As shown in FIGS. 111 to 113, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 described later protrudes outward of the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state of being.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and a shaft of the transmission gear 8652. It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 8653 that is internally fitted in the hole, a one-way clutch OW1 in which an inner ring is externally fitted in the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted. ..

The transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6. Therefore, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6. As described above, the transmission gear 8651 is arranged with the transmission gear 8652 in a meshed state. Therefore, when the driving force for rotation is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and its axial length is formed to be longer than the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotation operation portion 8654. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is internally fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the driving force when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them. When the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is moved in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation unit 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is arranged in a state in which a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted in the inner circle portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward tilt of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 is transmitted by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654. Is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted and the transmission of the rotation drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is cut off.

Next, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. The cross section of FIG. 114 corresponds to that of FIG. 113.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the drive motor KM6 to rotate the rotation operation unit 8654 and by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotational. It is possible to form an embodiment in which the displacement is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 to operate the rotation operation unit. When a rotational force is generated in the 8654 in the same direction as the rotation A direction, the outer peripheral surface of the one-way clutch OW1 and the rotation operation unit 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 8654 can be operated at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the operation of the player.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to be non-rotational (the drive motor KM6 is non-rotational), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction to rotationally displace the rotation operation unit 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, not only the rotation operation unit 8654 forms a non-rotational or rotation state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the operation of the player. And the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed in a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the operation of the player.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654, which can give the player an interest. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of production modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that the effect can be increased and the player can be given an interest.

A sensor device or the like for measuring the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and it is possible to perform an effect that is changed based on the rotation speed and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654.

Although the present invention has been described above based on each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to each of the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, the drive motor KM2 is driven, but the third position to the second position or the second position is followed. The drive for retracting to one position may be driven by an urging spring. For example, an urging spring is arranged between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the payout operation, the drive of the drive motor KM3 is turned off, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the urging force of the urging spring. It can be displaced to one position side.

Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced by using the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched at the third position, so that the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. It is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the operation.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where two engaging protrusions 882 that regulate the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 at a predetermined interval has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotating body 800 can be restricted from rotating by an external force when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831 has been described, but the opening 831 is on the opposite side of the communication hole 881b of the rotating body 800. It may be formed on the side surface of. That is, openings may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be the inlet of the sphere and the other of which may be the outlet of the sphere. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the throwing path, especially when there is no placement space on the back side of the game board 13. , The throwing route can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 800 is formed in a columnar shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof may be used as a shape. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize that the effect is switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described, but a push-in type button may be arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can not only apply the rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also press the push button or combine the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. .. As a result, since a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, it is possible to give the player an interest.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like that blocks the transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the driving force of the rotation from the drive motor KM6 can be blocked, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be suppressed from being continued. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction is input to the rotation operation unit 8654 by the player.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's finger or clothes is sandwiched between the upper plate 8017 on the rotation direction side of the rotation operation unit 8654, the rotation is stopped. It is possible to prevent the player's fingers and clothes from being further pinched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being caught between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper plate 8017 and injured.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to the A direction, but the rotation direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform the movement accompanying the effect of the gaming machine, and the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, by tapping the rotation operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate to the right, it is possible to produce an effect such as tapping (slap) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the first direction and movably formed to move the game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from outside the orbital region of the displacement member to the orbital region of the displacement member. In a gaming machine provided with a regulating means for restricting the throwing of a ball, the displacement member is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game machine A1.

Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and a game ball movably formed in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and an orbital region of the displacement member from outside the orbital region of the displacement member. A gaming machine provided with a regulating means for restricting the throwing of a gaming ball to is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of gaming balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulating means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means due to, for example, sticking or wear, there is a possibility that more than a specified number of gaming balls are thrown toward the orbital region of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, a game ball exceeding a specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be bitten into the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that more game balls than the specified number will flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track region of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the orbital area of the displacement member is expanded and the game balls exceeding the specified number are used as the orbital area. Can be accepted. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, problems caused by the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream side communicates with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the restricting means restricts the passage of the game ball in the passage member. A featured gaming machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member is provided, and the regulating means is the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown into the orbital region. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the number of game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a predetermined number of gaming balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the gaming ball in the second direction from the reference position. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable only by a distance exceeding the above.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a predetermined number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and is formed to be second from the reference position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the second direction to reduce the specified number. The excess game ball can be thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, since the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the orbital region, the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. It will be possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so as to be able to change its posture when it reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so that the posture can be changed when the predetermined position is reached. Therefore, a predetermined number of games can be played up to the predetermined position. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling off from the displacement member, when the ball reaches a predetermined position, the change in the posture of the displacement member is used to prevent the game ball from falling off. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

The gaming machine A4 includes a recess that is recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The gaming machine A5 is provided with a protrusion to be engaged, and the posture is variably formed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified because the protrusion is provided and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed.

In the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member toward the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion hits the lower half surface of the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion is thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half surface (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is placed on the lower half surface at the protrusion. You can move it while pushing it. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

Further, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the orbital region of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number). The distance between the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be secured by the amount of the protrusion length of the portion. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region.

Furthermore, since the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the concave portion and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof are also used for the protrusion, the number of parts is reduced by that amount and the product is manufactured. It is possible to reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the concave portion is characterized in that the size in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball sent to the orbital region of the displacement member. (That is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) can easily pass through the recess when it is moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

In any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and more than the recess. A wall portion located on the first direction side is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball moves to the wall. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the displacement member is brought into contact with the portion and the posture change of the displacement member is regulated.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and is recessed. A wall portion located on the first direction side of the displacement member is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball becomes a wall portion. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member and the posture change of the displacement member is regulateably formed, only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is maintained while the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. It can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. The lower half surface can be brought into contact with the wall portion so that the game ball can easily get over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. It is possible to regulate the change in posture and prevent the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

On the other hand, when a game ball (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) is not thrown in the orbital region of the displacement member, the game ball is not interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so that the protrusion is recessed. By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a predetermined number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

A9, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to regulate or allow the throwing of a gaming ball into the orbital region of a member. That is, since the regulation or tolerance of the throwing of the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, depending on the sensor device for detecting the position of the regulating means and the detection result of the sensor device. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating means allows the gaming ball to be thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. A featured gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the regulating means is linked to the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction, and the gaming ball of the displacement member to the orbital region. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown in the orbital region of the displacement member and in the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is displaceably arranged in the base member, and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side is arranged vertically below and above the vertical direction. The gaming machine A11 is provided with a recovery member having an opening in the slingshot.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, the displacement member is disposed in a displaceable base member and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side in the vertical direction. Along with this, a recovery member having an opening in the vertical direction is provided, so that the game balls are moved along with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member (that is, the amount exceeding the specified number). The game ball) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovered member is at least the first in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A game machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size located below the vertical end of the end portion on the directional side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displacement position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since it is formed in a size located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, it is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displacement position. It is possible to receive and collect the game balls (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) from the opening of the collection member.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the gaming machine A13 is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. ..

According to the gaming machine A13, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, a displacement member is provided because it is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. It is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member when the game balls exceeding the specified number are discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member due to the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track region.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the displaced position and in which the displaced member is displaceably arranged. The gaming machine A14 is characterized in that it is inserted into the recessed space of the recess and is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Along with this, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion is engaged with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the posture of the displacement member can be changed, and a predetermined number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. In a game machine provided with a distribution means for distribution, the game machine is provided with a displacement member which is formed to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacement member is in contact with the distribution means and is displaced. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, since the conventional gaming machine described above has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls flowing down the flow passage can be used. It is evenly distributed (that is, half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, a displacement member that is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage is provided, and the displacement member abuts on the distribution means and is displaced to distribute. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B1, the distribution means can be displaced by using the displacement of the displacement member, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacementing the distribution means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the driving by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the game machine B1, the distribution destination by the distribution means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives the game ball from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the first branch can be obtained. It is possible to reliably receive the game balls distributed in the passage to the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with an urging means for applying an urging force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacement member. Displaces the distribution means in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging force, so that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage or the other of the second branch passage, and the urging means is used. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage by the urging force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, an urging force is applied to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Since it is provided with a force means, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means. It can be unnecessary that the member is in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member. In a state where the pachinko ball cannot be received, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

In the game machine B3, a base member is provided that is displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and the displacement member is arranged, and the base member is arranged at the first position. In a state where the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage and can come into contact with the distribution means, and the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member. The gaming machine B4, wherein the member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage and cannot contact the sorting means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, a base member formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position is provided, and the displacement member is arranged on the base member. It is possible to form a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable at a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position. When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member moves the game ball from the first branch passage. Since it is possible to receive and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, so that the displacement member. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in excess of the specified number that can be received. If a means for restricting the inflow of the game ball into the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, and then the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and a resistance is given to a gaming ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and passes through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for imparting resistance to the gaming ball is provided, the speed of the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened by that amount, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. Further, the output of the drive means can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be slowed down, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine B6 or B7, the distribution means includes a first haunting portion and a second haunting portion that are formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the sorting means. The 1 haunting portion is formed so that the game ball flowing down the flow passage can be distributed to the 2nd branch passage by projecting to the 1st bifurcation passage, and the 2nd haunting portion is formed from the 1st haunting portion. Is also located on the downstream side of the first branch passage, and by projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first haunting portion thereof. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when one of the second haunting portion protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6 or B7, the distribution means has a first haunting portion and a first haunting portion formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage with the displacement of the distribution means. A second haunting portion is provided, and the first haunting portion is formed so that the game ball flowing down the downflow passage can be distributed to the second branch passage by projecting to the first branch passage, and the second haunting portion is formed by the first. It is located on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the haunting part, and by projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first haunting part thereof. And in the state where one of the second haunting portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first infestation portion protrudes to distribute the game ball flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage, and the first infestation portion retracts to cause the game ball to flow down the downflow passage. The second state of distributing to the first branch passage, the third state of restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage (storing the game ball) by projecting the second infestation part, and the third state. 2 By retracting the haunting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the first branch passage is allowed to flow down and be received by the displacement member. Only a number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, since the distribution means includes the first haunting portion and the second haunting portion, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the sorting means (first haunting portion and second haunting portion). (Structure for operating and exerting those functions) can be simplified. Further, in the state where one of the first infested portion and the second infested portion protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that two positions (switching positions) of the displacement members are obtained. And the receiving position), it is sufficient if the sorting means is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions. That is, by displacing the distribution means at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure of displacement of the distribution means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game ball can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a distribution means for distributing, characterized in that it is located downstream of the distribution means and is provided with a flow state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow of a game ball in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, it is located on the downstream side of the distribution means and is provided with a flow state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

That is, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game ball is stored in the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. , The game ball stored in the first branch passage can be flowed down (opened). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is performed. , The action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (open) can be formed. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

In the gaming machine C1, the first branch passage is provided in a state where the distribution means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage. In a state where the flow of the gaming ball in the above is regulated by the flow state changing means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being tolerated.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, an integrated member in which the sorting means and the flowing state changing means are integrally formed is provided, so that the sorting means and the flowing state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the sorting means and the flow state changing means are formed separately, the two parts are formed, which complicates the structure for operating the two parts and lowers the reliability of the operation. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the sorting means and the flow state changing means can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in this case, if the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first When the game ball is stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow state changing means and stored in the first branch passage. The game ball that has been played can be flowed down (opened). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage. Not only can the stopped (stored) game balls flow down (open), but these storage and opening movements can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution movement.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable in the first state position and the second state position, and in a state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is the first. The flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. The game machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position. , The distribution means is arranged at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. Is displaced in two positions (first state position and second state position) to distribute the game ball flowing down the flow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and to the first branch passage. It is possible to form an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the distributed game balls and an operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open), and these storage and opening operations can be performed. , Can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the gaming ball is projected to the first branch passage. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is formed into an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member while restricting the flow of the slingshot.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the first branch passage is formed. By protruding to, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the shape is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member. The area of the hole to be opened can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C4, the flowing state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means can easily regulate the flow of the gaming ball. It can be arranged in a direction, and it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage.

Further, in a state where the flow-down state changing means is projected to the first branch passage to the maximum and the flow-down of the game ball is restricted, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the flow-down state changing means, so that the game ball can be suppressed from rampaging. ..

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the integrated member is provided with an urging means for urging the integrated member in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage, and the flow state changing means is described as described above. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4 or C5, an urging means for applying an urging force to the integrated member to urge the flow state changing means in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage is provided. Therefore, by utilizing such urging force, it is possible to easily maintain the integrated member in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide with each other. And, because the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the flow state changing means is likely to be absorbed, but the urging direction of the urging means is such that the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By setting the direction to be the same, it is possible to suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage due to its own weight.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight. The member can be easily maintained in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position). Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the integrated part is maintained in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage due to its own weight, and the game ball flows down to the first branch passage. Can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in a state where a predetermined number of gaming balls are stored in the branch passage, the gaming balls flowing down the flowing passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow state changing means. In a state where a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls flow down. When flowing down the aisle, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from staying in the flowing down aisle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of the distribution destination as the second branch passage) from being obstructed by the game ball stagnating in the flow passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the flow passage on the side facing the second branch passage has the game balls flowing down the flow passage at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. The gaming machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the gaming ball on the side of the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, the inner wall on the side facing the second branch passage in the flow passage has a specified number of game balls flowing down the flow passage stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side of the game ball at the end of the game balls, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are made to collide with the game balls at the end of the specified number of game balls. After that, it can be easily flowed down to the second branch passage.

The last game ball out of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the flow state changing means). When the specified number is 1, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the flowing direction of the downstream end of the flowing passage is formed in a direction different from the flowing direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8 or C9, the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the flowing game ball collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage. A gaming machine C11 characterized by being an inner wall on an extension of the above.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of either of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is the flow-down position. Since it is an inner wall on the extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the passage, the distribution means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the sorting means to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage until the game ball can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably switch the distribution destination by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes a game ball flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the flow passage or the first branch passage. The gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set in the direction direction at the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. Since the protruding direction of the distribution means is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the gaming ball flowing down the flow passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the protrusion operation. Can push the game ball into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to incline downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and the flow state is described. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to incline downward toward the downstream side, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Since the flow state changing means is formed so as to be rollable and can appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage, the game is performed after the flow state changing means starts to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required for the flow of the ball to be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is regulated by the flow regulation of the game ball. You can easily make the protrusion in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage, in a protruding direction. A gaming machine C14 characterized in that a force component is acted on from a gaming ball to the flow state changing means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and protrudes at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted, the flow is caused by the impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member, the base member is associated with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of a member.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member is known (for example). , JP-A-2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and visible to the player and the retracted position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is provided. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem that it was easy to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member is, for example, one generated by a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, or an inertial force generated by an increase or decrease in the displacement speed of the displacement member (change in acceleration). Examples include those generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject a game ball, and the disposition member is formed. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable when the gaming ball is ejected from the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so that the gaming ball can be held and ejected. Since the disposition member is formed so as to be displaceable when the gaming ball is ejected from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball is offset. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball, for example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced, the gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the configuration is such that the displacement of the reverse member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposition member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Amusement machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the displacement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposing member or / or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the disposing member or / or the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the arrangement or / or the reverse member can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member or (and) reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member with respect to the displacement member. Can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position, and the displacement member starts the displacement from the first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. D5 is a gaming machine D5, characterized in that the displacement is started from the first position, at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of the inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position and one side of the base member from the second position. A mode in which the displacement is started from the first position close to the base member is formed so as to be able to be formed, and at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area and is displayed by the player. At the visible overhang position), the displacement is started from the first position, so that the rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, the weight of the displacement member can be determined by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the displacement member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the member rattles with respect to the base member, and the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be less likely to act on the base member by that amount. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member on which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed are provided, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. Therefore, when the displacement of the displacement member is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member, so that the displacement member is in the first position. In the state of being arranged in, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on the portion on the rack gear side to which the pinion gear is meshed after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member), and as a result, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the base member is provided with a support structure that supports one side of the base member in a displaceable manner and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is a regulatory means for regulating the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member to the base member and a base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is such that the base member is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means for regulating is provided, it is possible to prevent the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, the occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, a displacement member that is rotatably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided. Characteristic gaming machine E1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player as the rotating body member rotates or stops, the effect of the effect is small. There was a problem that was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the rotating cylinder member rotates or stops. Since it is possible to form an effect mode in which the displacement member is displaced in addition to the effect mode to be visually recognized, it is possible to give a change to the effect mode and enhance the effect.

The rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between at least the first position and the second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating cylinder member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, which is effective. Can be enhanced. Further, for example, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member arranged at the first position, and the displacement member is arranged (displaced) at the second position when the rotation of the rotating body member is stopped. The portion (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member can be formed so as to project outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, and the interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E2 includes a light emitting means for emitting light, and the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when it is displaced to a position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated to the outside.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the rotating cylinder member is formed having an internal space, and the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space. When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated to the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside and the displacement member. Is displaced to the first position, so that the emission to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the rotating cylinder member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, a driving means is required for each of the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the rotating body member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the rotating cylinder member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating cylinder member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the game machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmitting means includes a rotating side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member and the driving means. The displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotation driving force to the displacement member and the rotation driving force are transmitted to one of the rotation side transmitting means and the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotation driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine E5 is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the drive means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotary drive force, and the transmission means is a rotary side transmission for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive means to the rotating cylinder member. The means, the displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rotational driving force to be transmitted to either the rotating side transmitting means or the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotating cylinder member and the stop of the rotation and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement according to the rotation direction of the drive means, and the structure can be formed while forming a plurality of modes. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E5, the rotary side transmission means is a gear train forming a part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive means to the rotary cylinder member, and one of the gear trains. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being provided with a load gear to be meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means by using the one-way clutch mechanism, when the transmission of the drive force from the drive means is cut off, It becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the drive means is switched from the rotating body member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body member becomes in a rotatable state and continues to rotate due to the inertial force (rotation). There is a risk of being

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the rotating side transmitting means is a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating cylinder member. And a load gear meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive means is interrupted, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is provided. ) Can be used to prevent the rotating body member from continuing to rotate.

The gaming machine E5 or E6 is provided with a reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5 or E6, the reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body member from rotating in the reverse direction due to, for example, an deviation in the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body member or a collision of a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened and the internal space is opened. The gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that the is communicated with the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is formed. Is opened and the internal space is communicated to the gaming area, so that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area flows into the internal space of the rotating cylinder member, or the gaming ball in the internal space of the rotating cylinder member flows out to the gaming area. Can be made to. Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is closed, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 characterized by being overhanging to an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating cylinder member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the displacement member is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward one side, so that the gaming area is covered. After the flowed game ball is received by the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) to the internal space of the rotating body member along the downward inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating cylinder member by using the displacement member.

The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the gaming machine E9 or E10 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the overhanging displacement member is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member. It is possible to suppress interference with other members around the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is the said. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that the rotation of the rotating cylinder member is restricted when the pachinko machine is projected to the gaming area.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position in the rotation regulating member. , When the other side of the displacement member is overhanging to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging and is located on the rotation locus. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, the rotating body member externally forms an internal space formed inside the machine and the internal space thereof. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a communication port formed so that the gaming ball can pass therethrough.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. be able to. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation body member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface thereof. rice field. That is, since the rotating body member needs to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, it is formed to be relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the rotating cylinder member is large, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface thereof is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the rotating body member includes an internal space formed inside the body and a communication port formed so that the internal space can be communicated to the outside and the game ball can pass therethrough. , The game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body member, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body member can be utilized accordingly.

The communication port may be formed at only one place of the rotating cylinder member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed at only one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game ball can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game ball in the internal space can flow out).

Further, the rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a shape in which they are combined. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inlet for the game ball to flow in from the outside to the internal space, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. Can be. That is, the rotating body member can be utilized as a throwing passage for a game ball without rotating the rotating body member (while maintaining the stopped state). In the state where the rotating body member is rotated, the rotating body member may be utilized as a throwing passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, and is formed as an inflow port for flowing a game ball flowing down the gaming area into the internal space, and the second communication port is formed. The gaming machine F3 is formed on an end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out a gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming region.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member and is formed as an inflow port for the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed on the end face of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out the gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming area. The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body member is kept in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the first communication port (inflow port) is formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof, so that the inflow of the game ball can be visually recognized by the player. It can be made easy. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, when the rotating body member is displaced to the rotation position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. The gaming machine F4 is shielded by a member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a second position, the communication port is opened.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. You can switch.

In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating cylinder member, and the displacement member is positioned at the second position. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when it is displaced, the other side opposite to the one side is projected to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating cylinder member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is characterized in that one side thereof is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating cylinder member with respect to the other side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, since one side of the displacement member is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member with respect to the other side, when the rotating body member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with the member arranged around the rotating body member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing (displace to the first position) the displacement member. That is, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members and projecting (displaced to the second position) when the rotating cylinder member rotates. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with other members and hindering the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the rotating body member is supported by the base member and is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body member. On the other hand, the gaming machine F7 is provided with a fixing member that is not rotated.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member in which the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the internal space of the rotating body member while being supported by the base member. Since it is provided with a fixing member that is arranged in the center and is non-rotating with respect to the rotating body member, the gaming ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixing member or rolled on the fixing member toward the outlet. It is possible to prevent the gaming ball from rampaging in the internal space or being hindered from rolling and staying in the internal space as the rotating body member rotates.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member is provided, so that the displacement setting means is provided. It is possible to prevent the displaced displacement member from interfering with other members around the rotating cylinder member.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, in which the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member moves to the gaming area. A gaming machine F9 characterized by restricting the rotation of the rotating cylinder member when overhanging.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the displacement member is displaced. When the other side is overhanging to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging, and the other member located on the rotation locus thereof. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, the light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light and arranged in the internal space of the rotating cylinder member, and the second communication port formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction. The gaming machine F10 is provided with an opening formed on the end surface opposite to the end surface to be formed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, an opening is formed at the end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating cylinder member and opposite to the end face on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the outflow of the game ball can be smoothly performed through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be easily performed. Further, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls the internal space to the second communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
From the lining position in which the first member and the second member are displaceably formed and the first member invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member, and the state in which the first member is arranged at the lining position. In a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retractable position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member, the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is displaced. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the displacement of the machine is regulateably formed.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by arranging the first member in the lining position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to make the player visually recognize it.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and when the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated in the state of being displaced to the retracted position, so that the player can keep the second member in an appropriate state. It can be visually recognized and the effect of production can be ensured. That is, when the effect of moving the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, is applied to the second member. It is used as a means to regulate displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Can be enhanced. That is, it is not necessary for the second member to have a shape in which the position of the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the second member can be enhanced. .. On the other hand, if the position of the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may rotate (rotate) around the center of rotation due to its own weight. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the effect can be secured.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member displaceably arranged in the second member, and the displacement member is formed displaceably in a state where at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. A gaming machine G3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, a displacement member displaceably arranged in the second member is provided, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the state, when the effect of displacement the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the effect of the effect is further enhanced by further displacing the displaced member. Can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, and one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side thereof. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the above side is formed so as to be able to project into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, and the displacement member can rotate on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Since the other side opposite to one side is formed so as to be able to project to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the displacement member. .. In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the second member may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the displaced member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, and outside the area of the gaming area at the retracting position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, so that the game flows down the gaming area. It is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the second member and causing the second member to rotate. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is the rotation position at which the displacement member faces the game area side, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension). Can be suppressed.

Further, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, it is possible to secure a space for the displaced member to project to the game area due to the displacement of the first member to the retracted position. .. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, and the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G6 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Since it is formed in the shape of a plate curved along the line, the space required for displacement between the lining position and the retracting position can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members by that amount. Further, by forming the first member in a curved shape in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from being stopped on the first member arranged at the lining position, and smoothly. It can be made to flow down.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the second member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the second member, a drive means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, if the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are transferred to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

The gaming machine G7 is characterized by comprising a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member is provided, so that the displacement member is displaced. The driving means for causing the displacement can also be used as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving forces of different driving means, if a control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Since one member can be mechanically connected and their displacements can be synchronized, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmitting means is , The first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and the engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member. When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance of the first member in the one direction.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so that when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to increase the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. .. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first member, and the first member and the second member thereof. It is provided with an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. As the driving force is transmitted, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance of the first member in one direction. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be advanced in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means. Therefore, for example, in the entire section of the displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (that is, depending on a predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, the energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be used as a driving force for driving another member. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be displaced respectively.

The transmitting means is formed so that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. It may be something that is done.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation. In the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member causes the second member to move in one direction. The gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Since the two members are operably formed in a direction that displaces them in one direction, the weight of the displaced members can be used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. .. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when the displacement member is repeatedly formed to rotate 360 degrees with its rotation axis as the center of rotation, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in other sections. A mode in which the speed is higher than the displacement speed (rotational speed), that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a crank member that is projected from the main body portion and has a pin portion that is eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion. A sliding groove into which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported is provided, and the other end side of the arm member is displaced. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is projected from the main body portion rotationally driven by the second member and the main body portion thereof, and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a pin portion and an arm member having a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted are formed on one end side and the intermediate portion is rotatably supported by an arm member. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating operation of the other end side of the arm member. .. That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position according to the reciprocating operation on the other end side of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the middle of the displacement and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is such that the second member is the other. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the second member is displaced from the direction of displacement in the direction to the direction of displacement of the second member in the one direction.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position with the reciprocating movement of the other end side of the arm member, and the first position. During the displacement from the second position to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is the direction of the second member. Since the second member is displaced from the direction of displacement in the other direction to the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, even if it is displaced in any direction, from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member reciprocates between the overhanging position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is visibly extended from the player, and the retracting position (second position), which is the overhanging position or retracted position. In the case of operation, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. It is possible to overhang to the overhanging position, and when retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. Then, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, the displacement member is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member makes the second member. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement in one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable and is tilted downward in a predetermined section in the direction of the slide displacement, whereby the weight of the displacement member is increased. Since the sill is formed so as to be able to act in a direction that displaces the second member in one direction, the weight of the displaced member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

A gaming machine H6, wherein in any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the gaming ball. In the state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the gaming ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be further increased. Further, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the game ball is held by the displacement member, when the game ball is not held, or depending on the number of the game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in the predetermined section, the receiving portion receives the gaming ball when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member is operably formed in a direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball at least in a predetermined section. Since the force applied to the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball. Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member differs depending on whether the receiving portion receives the game ball, does not receive it, or receives the game ball according to the flow speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves in the front surface of the game board along the direction of gravity, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, a tulip, an object, etc. and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or a game ball that rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming a part or all of the driving force transmission path, and a load gear meshed with one gear in the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path of the driving force and one of the gear trains. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving portion in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. The second member is displaced ahead of the first member in one direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section). If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to move the second member to the first member. It is possible to suppress the displacement in advance in one direction (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving portion receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. It is possible to easily form the aspect of speeding up.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is characterized by being a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine K2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009). -119140 publication).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the rotation body member is not sufficiently utilized.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of utilizing a rotating cylinder member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged so that the player can see the rotating body member. , It is provided with an internal space formed inside the inside, and a communication port formed so that the internal space can be communicated to the outside and a game ball can pass therethrough.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. ..
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2. The first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member, and a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is moved to the internal space. It is formed as an inflow port, and the second communication port is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the direction of the rotation axis, and is formed as an outflow port for flowing out the game ball from the internal space to the game area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the rotating body member can be utilized.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the rotating body member can be utilized as a throwing passage of the gaming ball.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the gaming ball can be discharged.
<Code>
10 pachinko machine
410 base member
411f Recovery port (collection member)
422 cam member (part of support structure)
430 link member (part of support structure)
4441g Engagement wall (insertion member)
460 transmission mechanism
2464 movable rack (reverse member)
465 transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
467 Ball receiving part (displacement member)
3468 1st link member (reverse member)
470 base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall part)
481b1 recess
492 Displacement member (regulatory means)
520 base plate (second base member)
525 rolling part (passage member)
525b protrusion (resistance means)
540 distribution member (regulatory means, distribution means, integrated member)
540a Leg (protrusion)
541 regulation plate (first haunting part, distribution means)
542 storage plate (second haunting part, means for changing the flow state)
7710 Displacement member
7713 Ball receiving member (receiving part)
7720 transmission member (transmission means)
7721 rotating member (main body)
7722 Drive pin (pin part)
7723 arm member
7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left side transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 Load gear (load gear)
740 Right side transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 Rotating member (crank member)
741a protrusion (pin part)
742 arm member
742b 1st sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 box member (closure member)
770 Closure member (displacement member, first member)
780 rotation control member (displacement control means)
800 rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 base plate (fixing member)
811b communication port (opening)
812b communication port (second communication port)
820 LED board (light emitting means)
831 opening (1st communication port)
870 opening / closing member (displacement member)
871 protrusion (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
892 Sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
KR1 1st throwing route (flow route)
KR2 2nd throwing path (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd throwing path (1st branch passage)
SP4 urging spring (urging means)
KM4 drive motor (drive means)
OW1 one- way clutch (engagement means)

10 Pachinko machine
82a Third electric accessory 82a (switching means)
440 Lower displacement member (displacement means)
464c Abutment plate (part of displacement means)
542 Storage plate (contact means)
KR1 1st throwing path (flow passage)
KR2 2nd throwing path (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd throwing path (1st branch passage)
SE2 sensor device (detection means)

Claims (1)

A game ball that is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball, a flow passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the flow down passage, and the game ball that flows down the flow passage by the contact. In a gaming machine provided with a contact means that affects the flow into the second branch passage.
It has a switching means that can switch between allowing and limiting the flow of the game ball to the flow passage, and a predetermined passage that communicates with the first branch passage and can receive the game ball from the first branch passage, and is displaceable. Equipped with a displacement means formed in
When the game ball flowing down from the flow-down passage to the first branch passage can flow down to the predetermined passage, a part of the displacement means is brought into contact with the contact means. The contact between the contact means and the game ball is released , and the contact is released.
The first branch passage is not provided with a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball existing in the first branch passage, and the second branch passage detects a game ball existing in the second branch passage. Possible detection means are provided
In a state where the displacement means is in contact with the contact means, it is possible to configure a state in which the end portion of the predetermined passage on the side connected to the first branch passage is invisible.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to configure a state in which the end portion is visible in a state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the contact means .

Images